Skip to main content

Full text of "The Epistle to the Galatians : an essay on its destination and date : with an appendix on the visit to Jerusalem recorded in chapter II"

See other formats


W^M^'$$&k' 


\:m. 


feiilifiil^^ 


N>^ 


^  OF  PRimro 


BS    2685.4    .A83  ] 

Askwith,  E.  H.  1864- 

The  Epistle  to  the  Galatians 


THE  DESTINATION  AND  DATE  OF  THE 
EPISTLE  TO  THE  GALATIANS 


THE    EPISTLE    TO 
THE    GALATIANS 

AN  ESSAY  ON 
ITS  DESTINATION  AND  DATE 


WITH  AN  APPENDIX  ON  THE  VISIT  TO  JERUSALEM 
RECORDED  IN  CHAPTER  II. 

BEixa  AN  Enlargement  of  the  Norrisian  Prize  Essay  for  1898  on 
"The  Locality  of  the  Churches  of  Galatia" 


/       BY 

E.  H.  ASKWITH,  M.A. 

CHAPLAIN,    AND    FOaMERLY   SCHOLAR,    OF   TRINITY    COLLEGE,    CAMBRIDGE 


MACMILLAN   AND   CO.,   Limited 

NEW   YORK  :    THE    MACMILLAN   COMPANY 

1899 

All  rights  reserved 


<5LASGOW  :    PRINTKD   AT   THB   UNIVBRSITT   PHHS« 
BY   ROBKHT   MACLEHOSK   AND   CO. 


PREFACE. 

The  first  five  chapters  of  the  present  work  are  substan- 
tially the  Essay  on  the  Locality  of  the  Churches  of  Galatia, 
for  which  the  present  writer  obtained  the  Norrisian  prize 
last  year.  That  essay  dealt  only  with  the  Destina- 
tion of  the  Epistle  to  the  Galatians,  and  not  at  all 
with  its  Date,  which  was  outside  the  limits  allowed 
by  the  subject  as  set  by  the  examiners.  It  has  seemed 
better  now  to  present  to  the  public  a  discussion  of 
the  Date  of  the  Epistle  along  with  the  arguments  on 
the  Locality  of  the  Churches  to  which  it  was  addressed. 
Not  that  the  two  questions  cannot  be  kept  separate. 
On  the  contrary  they  are  quite  distinct,  and  an 
endeavour  has  been  made  to  keep  them  so  in  the 
following  pages. 

But  it  seemed  to  the  author  that,  as  Professor 
Kamsay's  championship  of  the  South  Galatian  theory 
in  opposition  to  the  North  Galatian  theory,  as  held  by 
Bishop  Lightfoot,  has  been  coupled,  somewhat  to  the 
confusion  of  the  two  things,  with  a  new  dating  of  the 
Galatian    Epistle,  it    was    desirable   for   anyone    who 


vi  PREFACE, 

accepted  the  South  Galatian  theory  to  have  his  ideas 
clear  as  to  any  possible  bearing  such  acceptance  might 
have  on  the  Date  of  the  Epistle.  The  following  pages 
are  intended  to  give  the  writer's  reasons  why  he 
agrees  with  Professor  Ramsay  that  the  Epistle  to  the 
Galatians  was  addressed  to  the  Churches  of  South 
Galatia,  and  why,  at  the  same  time,  he  cannot  agree 
with  the  Professor  in  his  attempt  to  correct  the 
chronological  sequence  of  the  second  Epistle  to  the 
Corinthians,  the  Epistle  to  the  Galatians,  and  that  to 
the  Eomans  as  given  by  Lightfoot.  There  is  no 
difficulty,  as  these  pages  shew,  in  placing  the  Epistle 
to  the  Galatians  in  point  of  time  where  Lightfoot 
placed  it,  and  at  the  same  time  agreeing  with  Pro- 
fessor Eamsay  as  to  its  Destination. 

It  is  not  easy  to  state  exactly  the  extent  to  which 
originality  may  be  claimed  for  this  essay.  In  a  sense 
the  whole  essay  is  original,  if  by  originality  is  here 
understood  an  independent  examination  of  the  bearing 
of  the  Acts  of  the  Apostles  and  the  Epistle  to  the 
Galatians  on  the  two  problems  before  us.  But  nothingj 
is  original,  in  so  far  as  every  thought  is  evolved  from 
some  previous  thought  suggested  by  other  w^riters. 
The  author  has  not  hesitated  to  avail  himself  of  the 
investigations  of  others,  and  in  particular  he  owes 
much,  chiefly  in  regard  to  his  treatment  of  the 
question  of  the  Locality  of  the  Churches  of  Galatia, 
to   Professor   W.  M.   Eamsay,   of  whose  two  books — 


PREFACE.  vii 

The  Chitrch  in  the  Roman  Umjm^e  before  A.D  170, 
and  St.  Paid,  the  Traveller  and  the  Roman  Citizen — he 
has  made  constant  use.  If  he  has  not  made  equal  use 
of  those  two  other  works,  The  Historical  Geography  of 
Asia  Minor  and  The  Cities  and  Bishoprics  of  Phrygia, 
it  is  not  because  he  is  indifferent  to  their  vakie.  But 
all  reasoning  respecting  the  development  of  Christianity 
in  Asia  Minor,  based  on  the  exploration  of  the  country, 
is  purposely  avoided  in  this  essay.  The  special  aim  of 
what  is  here  written  is  to  examine  the  bearing  of  the 
Acts  and  the  Galatian  Epistle  on  the  two  problems. 

The  present  writer  regards  such  evidence  as  is 
afforded  by  Professor  Eamsay's  archceological  discoveries 
as  corroborative  rather  than  as  primary.  And  he  felt 
moreover  that  a  detailed  examination  of  the  use  of 
VaXaTLKo^  in  Acts  xvi.  6  and  xviii.  23.  had  not  yet 
been  made  by  any  writer,  and  that  until  some  such 
work  was  done,  it  would  be  impossible  to  reach  any 
final  conclusions.  The  moment  for  the  opening  out  of 
the  whole  question  was  opportune,  for  Professor  Piam- 
say's  historical  knowledge  of  Asia  Minor  had  suggested 
a  new  interpretation  of  the  compound  epithet  ^louy/ai/  kcxl 
Va\aTLKi]v  in  Acts  xvi.  6.  This  interpretation  has 
been  of  the  very  greatest  value  in  these  pages. 

The  weakness  of  Professor  Eamsay's  argument 
for  the  South  Galatian  theory  was  in  his  treatment 
of  the  participial  (/cwXiy^eVre?)  clause  in  Acts  xvi.  6. 
At   one   stage   in  his  work   St.   Paid   the   Tra.veller  he 


viii  PREFACE, 

seems  to  come  dangerously  near  to  making  a  full  stop 
in  sense  after  oirjXOov  t^v  ^pvyluv  kui  TaXaTiKrji/  -^wpav, 
as  for  instance  on  page  178,  in  his  rendering  of  the 
first  few  verses  of  the  sixteenth  chapter.  But  at  a 
later  point  (p.  212)  he  comes  nearer  to  a  grammatical 
appreciation  of  the  participle.  At  the  same  time  one 
cannot  but  feel  that  the  difficulty  remains  a  difficulty 
even  after  reading  his  explanations.  If  in  the  follow- 
ing pages  any  success  has  attended  the  writer's  efforts 
to  overcome  this  difficulty,  he  will  feel  that  he  has  not 
written  to  no  purpose.  He  thinks,  and  hopes  he  may 
convince  others,  that  the  predicative  interpretation  of 
the  participle  is  the  right  one.  The  part  of  the  essay 
treating  of  this  point  has  been  largely  re-written  since 
the  ISTorrisian  prize  was  awarded,  and  to  the  writer  of 
it  the  case  seems  even  stronger  than  when  he  first 
proposed  it. 

There  is  further  added  to  the  argument  for  the 
South  Galatian  theory,  which  was  given  in  the  Nor- 
risian  essay,  a  new  chapter  on  the  bearing  of  Acts 
XX.  4  on  the  theory. 

For  the  part  of  this  essay  dealing  with  the  Date  of 
the  Galatian  Epistle  acknowledgment  must  be  made  of 
obligations  to  Bishop  Lightfoot's  essay  on  the  subject 
in  his  Commentary.  The  argument  he  there  develops 
seems,  with  but  few  necessary  alterations,  to  hold  quite 
as  well  for  the  dating  of  the  Epistle  if  it  be  addressed 
to    South  Galatians  as  if  it   be  for  Northern  Galatia. 


PREFACE.  ix 

Let  the  ovtm^  Ta-^w<i  of  i.  6,  and  the  to  irporepoi/  of 
iv.  13  be  rightly  interpreted,  and  we  have  a  dating  of 
the  Epistle  perfectly  consistent  with  the  theory  of  its 
South  Galatian  Destination. 

The  present  writer  cannot  but  express  his  regret 
that  Professor  Eamsay  should  have  allowed  some  of 
his  arguments  for  dating  the  Epistle  from  Antioch 
ever  to  have  been  printed  without  a  more  exact  com- 
parison of  them  with  Bishop  Lightfoot's  already  existing 
arguments  for  assigning  to  the  Galatian  Epistle  a  date 
later  than  that  of  the  second  Epistle  to  the  Corinthians. 
In  the  seventh  chapter  of  this  essay  some  of  Professor 
Eamsay's  arguments  have  been  examined.  It  is  to  be 
feared  lest  the  weakness  of  the  Professor's  case,  in 
regard  to  the  Date  of  the  Epistle,  may  delay  a  general 
acceptance  of  his  theory  as  to  its  Destination. 

It  is  unfortunate,  too,  that  Professor  Piamsay  has 
not  been  content  to  establish  one  point  at  a  time 
instead  of  trying  to  prove  three  things  together.  There 
are  three  points  he  is  insisting  on  : 

(1)  The  South  Galatian  theory. 

(2)  The  Antiochene  Dating  of  the  Galatian  Epistle. 

(3)  The   identification  of  the  visit  of   Gal.  ii.  with 

the  earlier  of  the  two  visits  in  the  Acts. 
But    these    are    three    separate     questions,   requiring 
separate  treatment.      It  is  by  his  failure  to  discriminate 
these  questions  that  Professor  Eamsay  alienates  many 
whom  he  would  wish  to  convince. 


X  PREFACE. 

In  conclusion,  the  author  of  this  work  begs  the 
indulgence  of  his  readers.  It  is  his  first  public  venture 
in  Biblical  criticism,  and  he  cannot,  therefore,  hope  to 
have  always  succeeded  in  expressing  himself  as  clearly 
as  he  may  hope  to  do  in  later  work,  if  he  be  permitted 
to  contribute  more  in  this  field.  He  has  honestly 
tried  to  see  both  sides  of  each  question  he  has 
attempted  to  treat  of,  and  if  his  conclusions  are  wrong 
it  is  not  because  they  are  hasty. 

It  is  hoped  that  these  pages  are  fairly  free  from 
misprints.  If  this  is  so,  no  small  share  of  the  credit 
is  due  to  the  Rev.  W.  L.  E.  Parsons,  Lecturer  in 
Theology  at  Selwyn  College,  who  has  kindly  read  over 
all  the  proof  sheets. 


Trinity  College, 
Cambridge, 

Ea§tei\  1899. 


CONTENTS. 


CHAPTEE   I. 

PAGE 

Introductory,  ---------         1 


CHAPTEE  II. 

The  Meaning  of  TaXari/cos  in  Acts  xvi.  6,  when  dieXdopres 

IS    READ, -  -  -  -  7 

CHAPTEE   III. 

The  Meaning  of  FaXaTiKos  in  Acts  xvi.  6,  when  8iij\6ov 

is  read, -         -         -         -       25 

CHAPTEE   IV. 

The  Use  of  TaXarLKos  in  Acts  xviii.  23,         -         -         -       54 

CHAPTEE  V. 

Arguments  for  the  Destination  of  the  Epistle  derived 

FROM  ITS  Contents,  -------       67 


xii  CONTENTS. 

CHAPTER   VI. 

I'AOK 

The  Corroborative  Evidence  of  Acts  xx.  4,        -        -       83 

(JHAPTER   VII. 

Arguments  for  the  Date  of  the  Epistle  derived  from 

Statements  found  therein,      -----      !;9 

CHAPTER  VIII. 

Arguments  for  the  Date  of  the  Epistle  derived  from 
A  Comparison  of  it  with  other  Epistles  of  Known 
Date, 119 

APPENDIX. 

The  Occasion  of  the  Visit  to  Jerusalem  recorded  in 

Galatians  II., 137 


ANALYSIS   OF   CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER   I. 
INTRODUCTORY. 


PAGE 


The  purpose  of  the  present  inquiry  twofold,       -         -         -  1 

The  distinctness  of  the  two  problems,  .  .  .  .  i 
The   right   method    of    a    logical    solution   a    matter    of 

choice,         -- -2 

The  choice  made,        --------  2 

The  nature  of  the  inquiry, 2 

The   position  of   the  problem    since    Professor   Ramsay's 

contributions, -  3 

Bishop  Lightfoot's  opposition  to  Renan,     -         -         -         -  3 

The  data  of  the  problem, 4 

Reasonable  to  search  for  churches  of  Galatia  in  Acts,          -  5 

The  use  of  TaXanKos  in  Acts  xvi.  6  and  xviii.  23  uncertain,  5 

The  two  passages  to  be  considered  separately,  -  -  -  5 
No  appeal  to  the  Galatian  Epistle  except,  for  purpose  of 

fairness,  to  Galatians  iv.  13, 5 

This  exception  can  cause  no  confusion,  -  -  .  -  5 
The  order  will  be  Acts  xvi.  6,  Acts  xviii,  23,  the  Galatian 

Epistle,  other  considerations, 6 


xiv  ANAL  YSIS  OF  CONTENTS. 

CHAPTER  II. 

THE  iMEANING  OF  ra\aTt/c6s  IN  ACTS  XVI.  6,  WHEN  dLeXBbvT^s 
IS    READ. 

PAGE 

The  churches  of  South  Galatia,  ------  7 

Acts    xvi.    6    fif. — The    Revised    translation,     objections 

to  it,  -         -         -         -         -         -         -         -         -         -  8 

The  Phrygo-Galatian  region,      ------  9 

Bishop  Lightfoot's  and  Professor  Ramsay's  interpretations,  10 
A  priori  objections  to  both  of  Lightfoot's  suggested  mean- 
ings,  ---------  10 

Examination  of  the  context  necessary,        -         -         -         -  11 

The  general  emphasis  of  the  paragraph  Acts  xvi.  6-10,       -  12 

The  alternative  readings  dieXdovres  and  8ci]\dou,  -         -         -  13 

Investigation  of  meaning  of  passage  with  reading  dLeXeSvTes,  14 

Alternative  renderings  possible,          -         -         .         .         .  14 

Reasons  for  preferring  one  to  the  other,     -         -         -         -  15 

^-wXl;^e;/Tes=^  forbidden  or  hindered,      -----  22 

Professor  Ramsay's  interpretation  of  the  Phrygo-Galatian 

region  makes  good  sense, 23 

Not  so  Bishop  Lightfoot's,          ......  24: 

Conclusion   that   the    dieXdovres   reading   does  not  favour 

North  Galatian  theory,        ------  24 


CHAPTER  III. 

THE   MEANING  OF   FaXariKds   IN  ACTS   XVI.   6,    WHEN  dLrjXeou 
IS   READ. 

How  far  reasoning  with  reading  dLeXBovres  applies  when 

5l7jX6ou  is  read,     --------       25 

KwXvdevres  possibly  retrospective,         -----       26 

In  this  case  North  Galatia  possibly  included  in  Phrygo- 
Galatian  region, 28 


ANALYSIS  OF  CONTENTS.  xv 


PAGE 


Eeason  for  St.  Paul  going  there, 28 

The  Kw\vju.a  of  Acts  xvi.  6  and  the  dadeveLa  t??s  aapKos  of  Gal. 

iv.  13, -         -         -       29 

Are  these  connected?  -------       29 

If  we  take  them  to  be  in  effect  the  same,  we  are  led  into 

serious  difficulties,  -.---..  30 
Nor  have  we  any  a  priori  justification  for  supposing  them 

to  be  the  same, -       32 

So  then  keep  the  two  distinct,  ------       33 

Reductio  ad  absnrdum,        -------       33 

KuiXvdevres  clause  not  retrospective,      -----       34 

Participle  to  be  interpreted  predicatively,  -         -         -       35 

General  examination  of  predicative  use  of  the  participle : 

(1)  In  Classical  Greek,        -         -         -         ._       3(5 

(2)  In  Hellenistic  Greek  and  especially  St.  Luke,  37 
Examples  given  from  the  Acts  and  third  Gospel,  -  -  37 
Two  passages  in  St.  Luke's  Gospel  closely  parallel  with 

Acts  xvi.  6,  --------       43 

Examination  of  these, -         .       44 

Other  instances,  -         - -       45 

Force   of    the    participle    KOjXvdevres   if    predicatively   ex- 
plained,      ---------       46 

E elation  of  participial  clause  to    ^LrfKdov   ttjv   ^pvyiav    Kai 

Td\aTiKr]v  xcipaz',  --------        4g 

Bearing  of  predicative  rendering  of  participle  on  the  rival 

theories  respecting  the  churches  of  Galatia,  -         -       48 

The  appropriateness  of  the  epithet   Plirygo-Galatian    to 
describe  a  region  stopping  short  at  boundary  of  Asia 
where  preaching  was  forbidden,  -----       50 

Whether  dieXdovres  or  dirj\0ov  be  read,  Acts  xvi.  6-10  is  a 
record  of  Divine  guidance  to  Macedonia,  not  a  record 
of  missionary  work,     -         -         -         -         -         -         -       51 

Objections  to  Dean  Farrar's  restriction  of  Asia  to  L^dia,  -       52 


xvi  ANAL  VS/S  OF  CONTENTS. 

CHAPTER   IV. 

THE  USE   OF  Ta\aTLK6s  IN  ACTS  XVIII.  23. 

PA«E 

The  relation  of  ttjp  TaXarLKriv  x^P'^^  f^^i-  ^pvyi-o-v  to  r?y  ^pvyiay 

/cat  Ta\aTLKr]v  xwpai'j        ..-.-.-54 
Accounts  the  rival  Galatian  schools  are  able  to  give  of  the 

difference  between  these  two  expressions,    -         -         -       55 
North  Galatian  interpretation  of  difference,       -         -         -       56 

Serious  difficulties  caused  by  it, 57 

Further,  it  entirely  cuts  the  ground  from  under  one  of 

Lightfoot's   two   interpretations   of    Phrygo-Galatian 

region^         .-..-----       58 

And   the   other    interpretation    of    Lightfoot's   does   not 

account    for    Tir\v    VaXaTLKrju    x'^P'^^    where    riqv    VaXaTtav 

would  have  sufficed,    -------  59 

South  Galatian  interpretation  of  Acts  xviii.  23,  -         -  60 

Different  xwpa  from  that  of  Acts  xvi.  6,      -         -         -         -  60 

Difference  of  expression  accounted  for,       -         -         -         -  61 

Analysis  of  phrase  t7]v  Ta\aTi.Kr]v  x'^P"''  '^"■''-  ^pvyiav,       -         -  63 


CHAPTER   V. 

ARGUMENTS  FOR  THE   DESTINATION  OF  THE  EPISTLE 
DERIVED   FROM   ITS   CONTENTS. 

The  bearing  of  Galatian  Epistle  on  question  before  us,       -       67 
Arguments    for    North    Galatian    theory,   derived    from 

Epistle,  reduced  to  four  : 68 

(1)  The  dadeveLa  ttjs  aapKos  argument. 

(2)  The  psychological  argument. 

(3)  The  TO  irporepov  argument. 

(4)  The  cD  VaXdroLL  argument. 

All  these  examined  and  found  wanting,     -         -         -         -       76 


ANALYSIS  OF  CONTENTS.  xvii 

PAGE 

Supposed  evidences  of  South  Galatian  destination  examined  : 

(1)  Allusion  to  Timothy,      -         -         -         -         -       77 

(2)  As  an  angel  of  God, 77 

(3)  Reference  to  Barnabas, 78 

(4)  Argument  derived  from  presence  of  Jewish 

emissaries,  --....       79 

(5)  i-Mtts  in  Gal.  ii.  5,     -         -         -         -         -         -       80 


CHAPTER  VI. 

THE  CORROBORATIVE  EVIDENCE   OF  ACTS  XX.   4. 

Paley's  Horae  PauUnae  argument,     -         -         -         -         -       83 

The  date  of  1  Corinthians, 84 

The  date  of  2  Corinthians,  .--.._       85 

The  date  of  Romans, 86 

The  collection  for  the  saints, 88 

(1)  The  Area  over  which  the  collection  was  made. 

(2)  The  AVay  in  which  the  collection  was  made. 

(3)  The  Conditions  of  its  Conveyance  to  Jerusalem. 

The  delegates  in  Acts  xx.  4,       - 93 

Difficulties  of  text — but  general  facts  seem  to  stand  out 

clear, 94 

Absence  of  delegates  from  Achaia, 94 

Relation  of  present  argument  to  whole  question  of  Destina- 
tion of  Epistle, .         _  97 


CHAPTER  VII. 

ARGUMENTS  FOR  THE   DATE   OF  THE  EPISTLE  DERIVED 
FROM  STATEMENTS  FOUND  THEREIN. 

The   question  of  Date  distinct  from  that  of  Destination 

of  Epistle, 9£ 


xviii  ANALYSIS  OF  CONTENTS. 

I'AOK 

Examinatioii  of  statements  in  Epistle  which  have  been 
thought  to  fix  its  date  : 

(1)  oiirws  raxeois — different  interpretations,    -         -     101 

(2)  TO  irporepov — capable  of  double  interpretation, 

and    therefore  useless  to  determine  date. 
Must   itself  be  interpreted   after  date  is 
otherwise  determined,        -         -         -         -     105 
Incidental  expressions  : 

(1)  "All    the    brethren    who    are    with    me," — 

Professor  Ramsay's  explanation  the  exact 
contrary  of  Bishop  Lightfoot's,  -         -         -     lO.) 
Discussion  of  these  two,  -         -         -         -     110 

(2)  The  mention  of  Titus.     Was  he  known  to  the 

Churches  of  Galatia  ?     The  ambiguity  of 
"EWrjv  wv. — Professor  Ramsay's  conclusions 
not  borne  out  by  context,  -         -         -         -     113 
The  Epistle  does  not  by  itself  betray  its  own  date,    -         -     118 


CHAPTER   VIII. 

ARGUMENTS  FOR  THE  DATE  OF  THE  EPISTLE  DERIVED 
FROM  A  COMPARISON  OF  IT  WITH  OTHER  EPISTLES 
OF  KNOWN  DATE. 

Comparison  of  Galatian  Epistle  with  that  to  the  Romans,  -  120 

How  account  for  this  similarity,         .         .         -         .         .  121 

One  natural  way — other  ways  most  unlikely,     -         -         -  122 
Epistle   to   Galatians   precedes  that   to    Romans — reason 

for  thinking  this,         -         -         -         -         -         -         -  124 

Relation  of  Galatian  Epistle  to  the  second  Epistle  to  the 

Corinthians, -         -         -  125 

Bishop  Lightfoot's  arrangement  of  the  four  Epistles  com- 
mends itself  and  forms  a  good  working  hypothesis,     -  126 


ANALYSIS  OF  CONTENTS.  xix 


PAGE 


The    meaning    of    to    irpSrepov    and    ovtco^    rax^^is    on    this 

hypothesis, 127 

The  Galatian  defection  viewed  in  relation  to  the  assumed 

date  of  the  Epistle, 129 

"  All  the  brethren  who  are  with  us,"  easily  explained,        -     130 

dX-qdevuv  in  iv.  16, 131 

Interval  between  Galatian  and  Eoraan  Epistles,         -         -     131 

The  Apostle's  "  much  exhortation," 132 

Mr.  F.  Eendall's  argument  from  silence  respecting  the 
collection  for  the  saints  answered  by  Bishop  Light- 
foot,    -         -         - 133 

The  relation  of  Galatians  vi.  1  to  2  Corinthians  ii.  6,  7,       -     134 
Gratitude  to  Bishop  Lightfoot  and  Professor  Ramsay  for 
their  respective  contributions  towards  the  solutions  of 
the  two  problems, -         -     134 


[Appendix, 


XX  ANAL  YSJS  OF  CONTENTS. 


APPENDIX. 
THE  VISIT  TO  JERUSALEM  REFERRED  TO  IN  GALATIANS  II. 

PAGE 

The  five  visits  to  Jerusalem  recorded  in  the  Acts,      -         -     137 
The  argument  of  Galatians  i.  and  ii.,-         -         -         -         -     139 

Visit  of  Galatians  ii.  one  of  two, 141 

Argument  of  independence  of  St.  Paul's  Apostolic  authority 
not  invalidated  by  the  founding  of  the  Galatian 
churches  being  prior  to  visit  to  Jerusalem  recorded  in 
Galatians  ii. — rather  the  contrary,  -  -  -  -  142 
The  purpose  of  the  visits  in  Acts  xi.  and  xv.  respectively,  -  146 
Reasons  for  identifying  visit  of  Galatians  ii.  with  that  of 
Acts  xi.  insufficient  and  outweighed  by  those  for 
identifying  it  with  that  of  Acts  xv. : 

(1)  Missionary  labours  among  Gentiles  already 

begun. 

(2)  Principle  of  non-circumcision  of  Gentile  con- 

verts contended  for  and  won. 

(3)  Recognition  by  other  Apostles  of  St.  Paul's 

Apostolic  commission,  -  -  -  -  150 
Why  the  visit  of  Acts  xi.  is  omitted  by  St.  Paul,  -  -  151 
The  phrase  hih.  deKarea-adpuiv  €tQp,  -  -  -  -  -      153 


CHAPTEE  T. 
INTRODUCTORY 

In  the  New  Testament  there  is  an  Epistle,  generally 
recognised  as  Pauline,  addressed  to  the  "  Churches  of 
Galatia  "  (rah  €KKXt]G-iai9  Tr}^  FaXar/a?).  The  churches 
of  Galatia,  presumably  the  same,  are  mentioned  by  St. 
Paul  in  1  Cor.  xvi.  1.  The  purpose  of  this  Essay  is 
to  help  to  decide  first,  Where  these  churches  were, 
and  secondly,  the  Date  at  which  the  Epistle  was  written 
to  them. 

It  will  be  well  to  lay  it  down  at  once  that 
these  are  two  distinct  problems,  and  they  must  be 
treated  separately.  Illogical  reasoning  and  argument 
in  a  circle  are  the  inevitable  result  of  trying  to  decide 
two  unknown  points  at  the  same  time.  And  I  cannot 
but  think  that  no  final  solution  of  the  questions  of  the 
Destination  and  Date  of  the  Epistle  to  the  Galatians 
will  be  found,  except  by  deciding  one  without  any 
reference  to  the  other.  It  does  not,  of  course,  matter 
which  of  the  two  questions  we  take  for  independent 
consideration.  We  may  determine  the  Date  of  the 
Epistle  without  reference  to  its  Destination,  and  use 
it    when    found    to    determine    the   Destination.     Or 

A 


2  THE  EPISTLE    TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

we  may,  if  we  prefer  it,  determine  first  the  Destina- 
tion independently  of  any  special  theory  of  its  Date, 
and  afterwards  use,  if  we  wish,  what  we  have  so 
determined,  to  come  at  the  Date.  We  shall  here 
adopt  the  latter  alternative.  We  shall  ignore  entirely 
for  the  present  the  Date,  and  of  course  also  the  place 
of  origin  of  the  Epistle,  and  try  hy  a  method  of  sound 
argument  to  answer  the  question :  Where  were  the 
churches  of  Galatia  ? 

JSTow  there  are  two  conflicting  theories  respecting 
their  locality.  The  one,  having  the  weighty  support 
of  Bishop  Lightfoot,  places  them  in  Galatia  proper, 
that  is,  the  district  of  Asia  Minor  occupied  by  the 
Gauls  in  the  fourth  pre-Christian  century.  This  is 
conveniently  called  the  North  Galatian  theory.  The 
other  theory,  for  a  long  time  little  held  in  this  country, 
has  of  late  found  an  able  champion  in  Professor 
W.  M.  Eamsay.  It  is  that  the  churches  addressed 
in  Gal.  i.  2  and  mentioned  in  1  Cor.  xvi.  1  were  not 
in  Galatia  proper,  but  were  the  churches  founded  by 
St.  Paul  in  his  first  missionary  journey  at  Pisidian 
Antioch,  Iconium,  Lystra  and  Derbe ;  these  cities 
being  all  situated  in  what  was,  at  the  time  the  Epistle 
was  written,  the  Roman  Province  of  G-alatia.  This, 
^with  Professor  Eamsay,  we  will  call  the  South  Galatian 
\thcory.  According  to  it,  St.  Paul  uses  Galatia  in  a 
I  political,  rather  than  in  an  ethnological  sense.  Which 
%i  the  two  theories  is  likely  to  be  the  correct  one 
jwe  will  attempt  to  discover. 

The  question  is  purely  a  critical  one.  No  doctrine 
of  the  faith  is  affected  by  either  answer  we  may  give. 
It   is   not   the   genuineness   of  the   Epistle   which   is 


LOCALITY  OF  CHURCHES   OF  GALATIA.        3 

disputed  but  only  its  destination.  It  will  not  be 
difficult  then,  as  in  purely  theological  questions  it 
often  is,  to  lay  aside  prejudice  and  to  approach  the 
subject  dispassionately. 

Every  one  who  has  studied  the  question  of  the 
locality  of  the  churches  of  Galatia  must  recognise 
that  some  of  Professor  Earn  say's  arguments  advanced 
in  The  Church  in  the  Roman  Em2oire  before  A.D.  170, 
and  St.  Paul  the  Traveller  and  Roman  Citizen  are 
weighty  and  strong ;  and  they  are  the  stronger  coming, 
as  they  do,  from  one  whose  acquaintance  with  Asia 
Minor  in  life  and  history  is  so  close.  The  present 
writer  feels  the  force  of  these  arguments  to  be  so  great 
that  he  cannot  but  think  that,  were  Bishop  Lightfoot 
now  living,  he  would  in  the  light  of  them  have  to 
re-w^rite  his  essay  on  the  "  Churches  of  Galatia  "  in  his 
Commentary  on  the  Galatian  Epistle,  or,  at  any  rate, 
that  he  would  have  to  append  a  fuller  note  in  oppo- 
sition to  the  South  Galatian  theory  than  that  which 
appears  in  his  Commentary  on  the  Epistle  to  the 
Colossians.^  This  is  of  course  only  a  matter  of  opinion. 
The  expression  of  it  on  the  part  of  the  writer  may, 
however,  serve  to  emphasise  the  important  fact  that 
Bishop  Lightfoot's  advocacy  of  the  Xorth  Galatian 
theory  was  in  opposition  to  Kenan  and  not  to 
liamsay. 

It  is  not  proposed  in  this  essay  to  bring  forward 
a  number  of  disconnected  arguments  for  and  against 
each  theory.  Such  a  method  of  proceeding  would 
be  both  tedious  and  unsatisfactory.  The  question 
must  be  considered  ah  initio,  on   a  definite  plan,  and 

1  Pp.  24-28  of  that  work  (6th  edition). 


4  THE  EPISTLE    TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

the  argument  must  be  kept  clear,  and  unconfused  by 
side  issues. 

It  goes  without  saying  that  it  is  nothing  to  the 
purpose  that  St.  Peter  uses  Galatia  in  its  provincial 
sense.-^  We  have  to  decide  in  what  sense  St.  Paul 
uses  the  word.  It  is  recognised  now  by  both  sides 
in  the  Galatian  controversy  that  the  word  Galatia 
was  used  as  the  name  of  a  whole  province  extending 
far  beyond  the  country  of  Galatia,  as  well  as  in  its 
limited  sense ;  so  St.  Paul  may  have  used  the  word 
in  one  way,  St.  Peter  in  another  way. 

The  churches  of  Galatia  addressed  by  St.  Paul 
were  of  his  own  fovmdation.  He  had  visited  them 
certainly  once  and  probably  more  than  once  before 
he  wrote  his  Epistle.^  It  is  only  natural  then  to 
try  to  discover  these  churches  in  the  pages  of  the 
Acts  of  the  Apostles.  Turning  to  the  Acts  we  find 
that  the  word  TaXarLa  is  nowhere  used,  though  in 
two  passages  the  adjective  VaXariKo^  is  found  (Acts 
xvi.  6;  xviii.  23).  These  two  passages  must  be 
carefully  considered,  for  they  are  differently  interpreted 
by  the  advocates  of  the  two  theories.  What  we 
have  to  decide  from  them  first  of  all  is  whether  St. 

1 1  Peter  i.  1.  This  is  not,  I  believe,  disputed.  Hort  says  of  this 
verse,  "The  live  names  coincide  precisely  with  the  five  names  that 
make  up  the  titles  of  the  four  provinces  [four  because  Bithynia  and 
Pontus  formed  one  province]  of  the  Roman  empire  into  vt^hich  Asia 
Minor,  the  southern  littoral  eventually  excepted,  was  divided  in  and 
after  the  reign  of  Tiberius  ;  and  it  would  need  strong  positive 
evidence  to  refute  the  consequent  presumption  that  the  territory 
denoted  by  the  list  in  the  Epistle  was  the  territory  of  these  four 
Roman  provinces."  Hort,  1  Peter,  p.  157.  See  also  Lightfoot, 
Galatians,  p.  19  footnote  (7th  ed.). 

^Gdatians  iv.  13.  There  is  a  difference  of  opinion  as  to  the 
meaning  of  to  irporepou  here.  See  Lightfoot's  note  in  loc.  The 
question  is  discussed  in  chapter  v.  of  this  essay. 


LOCALITY  OF  CHURCHES   OF  GALATIA.        5 

Paul  ever  visited  North  Galatia,  and  if  he  did,  vi^hether 
he  founded  churches  there.  And  while  we  are 
attempting  to  decide  this  point,  it  will  be  best  to 
keep  the  issue  unconfused  by  unnecessary  appeals  to 
the  Galatian  Epistle.  The  question  we  are  trying 
to  answer  is :  Does  the  narrative  of  the  Acts  seem 
to  record  a  visit  to  North  Galatia  ?  One  historical 
notice  only  from  the  Epistle  shall  be  allowed  to  intrude 
itself,  namely,  that  it  was  on  account  of  an  infirmity 
of  the  flesh  that  St.  Paul  preached  to  the  Galatians 
formerly  or  on  the  former  occasion  or  visit  {oi^are  Se 
OTL  OL  aa-QeveLav  t>]9  caoKO^  evrjyyeXicraiuLrjV  vjmiv  to 
TTporepov,  Gal.  iv.  13).  To  discuss  fully  the  bearing 
of  Acts  xvi.  6  without  allowing  this  statement  from 
the  Epistle  its  proper  place,  would  be  impossible, 
and  unfair  certainly  to  advocates  of  the  North  Galatian 
theory.  Fortunately  there  is  no  doubt  as  to  the 
literal  meaning  of  the  acrOeveia  rrj?  crapKo^,  for  this 
is  conceded  by  both  sides.^  No  confusion  then  need 
arise  by  understanding  that  it  was  illness  or  bodily 
weakness  which  first  brought  or  detained  the  Apostle 
among  those  to  whom  the  Epistle  to  the  Galatians  is 
addressed. 

All  other  references  to  the  Epistle  will  be  rigidly 
excluded  until  we  have  exhaustively  treated  of  the 
two  passages  in  the  Acts.  Our  desire  is  to  avoid 
arguing    in    a    circle.      That   is    why    it    is    necessary 

^Lightfoot  in  his  note  on  the  verse  remarks  that  of  the  Greek 
fathers,  Chrysostom,  Theodoret  and  Theodore  of  Mopsuestia  slur 
over  the  preposition,  interpreting  the  passage  in  a  way  more  con- 
sonant with  the  sense  ei^  dadeveig..  But  if  the  right  meaning  be 
given  to  5ta  as  is  now  done,  there  can  be  no  doubt  as  to  the  literal 
sense  of  the  dadeveia  ttjs  aapKos.  Lightfoot  and  Ramsay  are  certainly 
agreed  on  this  point. 


6  THE   EPISTLE    TO    THE  GALATIANS. 

to  make  clear  at  the  outset  what  our  method  of 
procedure  is  to  be. 

Further,  in  examining  the  first  of  the  two  passages 
in  the  Acts,  the  second  had  better  be  excluded.  There 
is  no  great  difficulty  in  accommodating  Acts  xviii.  23 
to  either  interpretation  that  may  be  given  to  Acts  xvi.  6. 

After  we  have  examined  Acts  xvi.  6  ff.  we  shall 
do  well  to  consider  in  connection  with  our  results 
the  passage  in  chapter  xviii.,  where  VoKaTiKo^i  occurs. 
And  then  we  will  test  briefly  the  consistency  of  our 
conclusions  with  the  contents  of  the  Epistle  to  the 
Galatians.  Any  other  considerations  derived  from 
other   sources   can   then   find   a   place. 


OHAPTEE  II. 

THE  MEANING  OF  TaXanKds  IN  ACTS   XVI.  6,  WHEN 
8ie\d6pT€s  IS  EEAD. 

We  read  in  Acts  xiii.  and  xiv.  of  the  first  preaching  of 
the  Gospel  in  the  cities  of  Pisidian  Antioch,  Iconiiim, 
Lystra,  and  Derbe.  When  Paul  and  Barnabas  returned 
from  their  missionary  journey  they  left  a  church  in 
each  of  these  cities,  and  elders  in  every  church  (Acts 
xiv.  23).  Now  these  four  cities  were  all  contained 
within  the  limits  of  the  great  Eoman  province  of 
Galatia/  and  there  would  be  no  impropriety  in  calling 
the  Christian  communities,  duly  organised  in  them,  as 
we  gather  from  the  Acts  they  were,  "  Churches  of 
Galatia."  That  St.  Paul  does  so  address  them  is  the 
contention  of  the  supporters  of  the  South  Galatian 
theory.  But  no  hint  is  given  by  the  author  of  the 
Acts  in  the  two  chapters  recording  the  founding  of 
these  churches  that  the  cities  were  Galatian,  and  the 
epithet  TaXaTiKog  does  not  appear  in  the  narrative 
until  later  (Acts  xvi.  6).  When  it  does  appear,  there 
is  some  doubt  as  to  its  application,  and  it  is  here  that 

^This  is  conceded  by  those  who  hold  the  North  Galatian  theory. 
See  Lightfoot,  Galatians,  p.  18  (7th  edition). 


8  THE  EPISTLE    TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

the  advocates  of  the  two  contlicting  theories  respecting 
the  locality  of  •"'  the  churches  of  Galatia  "  find  them- 
selves opposed.  It  becomes  necessary  then  at  once  to 
examine  the  use  of  the  term  TaXarLKO^  in  the  first  of 
the  two  passages  where  it  occurs,  and  this  we  must  do 
at  some  length. 

The  text  of  Acts  xvi,  6.  7,  8  according  to  ^Yest- 
cott  and  Hort  runs  thus :  XirjXOov  Se  ttjv  ^pvyiav 
Kai  YaXaTLKtjv  ywpav,  Kw\vO€VTe^  viro  tov  ayiov  irvev- 
jULaTO^  \a.\T]a-ai  tov  \6yoi'  ei  Tt]  'A(Tia,  eXOoiTe^  Se 
KaTa  Tfjy  ^Lua-iav  e—eipcu^ov  eig  Tt]V  ^Swiav  TropevOtjicu 
Kcu  ovK  elaa-ei'  aiTOv^  to  Trvevjua  'Ifjcov'  TrapeXOoiTe^ 
Se   Ttji'   ^Lva-iav   KaT€J3t](Tai'   eig   TpccdSa. 

The  translation  as  given  by  the  Eevised  Version, 
whose  text  is  in  this  particular  case  in  agreement  with 
that  of  Westcott  and  Hort,  is  this :  "  And  they  went 
through  the  region  of  Phrygia  and  Galatia,  having 
been  forbidden  of  the  Holy  Ghost  to  speak  the  word 
in  Asia;  and  when  they  were  come  over  against  Mysia, 
they  assayed  to  go  into  Bithynia ;  and  the  Spirit  of 
Jesus  sufiered  them  not ;  and  passing  by  Mysia,  they 
came  down  to  Troas." 

A  few  remarks  may  here  be  made  in  criticism  of 
this  rendering. 

The  translation  differs  from  that  of  the  Authorised 
Version  in  certain  particulars,  but  the  changes  are 
mainly  due  to  a  difference  of  reading  in  the  Greek 
text.  There  is  certainly  one  correction  of  what  was 
before  a  mistranslation,  kuto.  tijv  ^Ivcriav  being  now 
rendered  over  against  Mysia  instead  of  to  Mysia  as 
before.     But  the  differences  in  the  text  are  the  cause 


LOCALITY  OF  CHURCHES   OF  GALATIA.        9 

of  the  more  important  changes  in  the  transla- 
tion. Thus  SiijXOov  is  substituted  for  SieXOovres,  so 
introducing  an  extra  principal  sentence  which  the 
Eevisers  have  thought  to  necessitate  a  retrospective 
rendering  of  the  participial  clause  KcoXvOevre^  viro 
Tov  ayiov  7rvevjuaT09  XaXtjarai  tov  \oyov  ev  t>/ 
'Ao-ia.  Further,  t>]u  is  omitted  before  Ta\aTiK)]v 
■)((j)pav.  This  omission  and  the  change  of  ^LeXQovreq 
into  SirjXOov  have  a  preponderance  of  authority  in 
their  favour.^ 

Deferring  discussion  on  any  change  in  the  interpre- 
tation of  the  passage  that  the  reading  SifiXOov  may 
require,  we  may  reasonably  express  regret  that  the 
Eevisers  have  not  rendered  Tt]v  ^pvylav  kcu  TaXaTiKtjv 
ywpav  by  a  phrase  more  free  from  ambiguity  than  the 
region  of  Phrijgia  and  Galatia.  This  might  stand  for 
Triv  ^pvyiav  -^wpav  Kai  rr/v  TaXarlav  or  for  Tf]v  ywpav 
rfjg  ^pvyiag  koi  Trji/  TaXarlav ;  but  neither  of  these  is 
what  St.  Luke  wrote.  He  speaks  of  a  passing  through 
the  Phrygo-Galatian  region.  This  translation  alone  is 
adequate,  preserving  as  it  does  the  adjectival  form  of 
both  ^pvyiav  and  VaXaTiKi]v,  and  bringing  out  the 
force  of  the  double  epithet  applied  in  the  original  to 
the  one  ^(copa. 

It  is  fortunate  that  Bishop  Lightfoot  and  Professor 
Eamsay^  are  agreed  as  to  this  last  point,  but  they 
disagree  in  their  understanding  of  what  x^P^  ^^  meant 
by  Trjv  ^puyiav  Koi  TaXariKrju  yoopav.  Indeed  it  is  on 
the  interpretation  of  this  expression  that  the  solution 

^  W.  and  H.  do  not  even  mention  the  reading  of  the  A.  V, 

-See  Lightfoot's  Gcdatiam,  p.  22,  footnote;  cf.  Ramsay's  Chioxh 
ill  the  Roman  Empire,  p.  78. 


10  THE  EPISTLE   TO    THE   GALATJANS. 

of  the  problem  of  the  locality  of  the  churches  of 
Galatia  depends. 

Lightfoot  says:^  "  The  form  of  the  Greek  expression 
implies  that  Phrygia  and  Galatia  here  are  not  to  be 
regarded  as  separate  districts.  The  country  which  was 
now  evangelised  might  be  called  indifferently  Phrygia 
or  Galatia.  It  was  in  fact  the  land  originally 
inhabited  by  Phrygians  but  subsequently  occupied  by 
Gauls :  or  so  far  as  he  travelled  beyond  the  limits  of 
the  Gallic  settlements,  it  was  still  in  the  neighbouring 
parts  of  Phrygia  that  he  preached,  which  might  fairly 
be  included  under  one  general  expression." 

The  first  explanation  here  given,  for  it  must  be 
noticed  that  we  are  invited  to  choose  between  two,  is 
hardly  satisfactory.  For  to  speak  of  a  country  or 
district,  which  had  once  been  part  of  Phrygia  and  then 
became  Galatia,  as  Phrygo-Galatian  is  surely  not  quite 
natural.  If  St.  Luke  meant  to  say  that  St.  Paul  went 
through  Galatia,  that  is  Northern  Galatia,  why  did  he 
not  say  rhv  TaXariav  ?  A  suggestion  of  Phrygia 
seems  quite  out  of  place.  Have  we  any  reason  to 
suppose  that  the  land  occupied  by  the  Gauls  was,  after 
it  became  Galatia,  known  also  as  Phrygia  ? 

Again  there  is  a  serious  objection  to  Lightfoot's 
alternative  explanation,  though  it  seems  better  than 
the  first.  One  would  hardly  call  a  district  Phrygo- 
Galatian,  if  only  2xc7't  of  it  were  Phrygian,  and  part 
Galatian.  The  compound  epithet  would  be  more 
appropriate  were  the  district  all  of  it  both  Phrygian 
and  Galatian. 

Now  Professor  Eamsay  contends  that  there  was  such 

^  Oalatians,  p.  22. 


LOCALITY  OF  CHURCHES  OF  GALATIA.      \\ 

a  district.^  Phrygia  was  partly  in  the  Eoman  province 
of  Asia  and  partly  in  that  of  Galatia.^  That  part  of 
Phrygia,  then,  which  belonged  to  Galatia,  or,  to  put  it 
the  other  way,  that  part  of  the  Province  of  Galatia 
which  ethDologically  was  Phrygia,  could  most  appro- 
priately be  called  Phrygo-Galatian.  The  word  x^i^" 
may,  as  Professor  Eamsay  thinks  it  is,  or  may  not  be 
used  as  a  technical  equivalent  of  regio.  That  is  a 
point  we  need  not  discuss  and  we  can  afford  to  leave 
the  question  open.  On  a  priori  grounds,  that  is  apart 
from  the  context,  the  Phrygo-Galatian  x^pa  seems 
more  likely  to  mean  what  Professor  Eamsay  says  it 
means,  than  what  Bishop  Lightfoot  suggests  it  may 
mean. 

But  a  priori  conclusions  are  sometimes  precarious. 
We  must  therefore  take  up  the  context  and  examine 
the  appropriateness  of  the  different  interpretations. 
What  we  have  really  to  determine  is  whether  the 
Phrygo-Galatian  region  is  new  or  old  ground  to  St. 
Paul.  According  to  Bishop  Lightfoot  it  is  new  ground; 
according  to  Professor  Eamsay  it  is  ground  already 
covered  in  the  first  missionary  journey  when  Barnabas 
was  St.  Paul's  companion.  Our  inquiry  then  is 
directed  to  this :  Does  the  context  suggest  old  or  new 
ground  ?  Unfortunately  we  are  not  absolutely  sure 
what  the  context  is,  for  there  is  the  alternative  reading 
SLe\Q6vTe<s,  and  when  we  have  decided  between  SiijXOov 
and  Sie\06vT€<i  there  is  still  difference  of  opinion  as  to 
the  relation  of  the  participial  clause  KcoXvOei/reg  k.t.X. 

^  Church  ill  the  Roman  Empire  and  St.  Paul  the  Traveller. 

'^See  maps  in  St.  Paul  the  Traveller  and  Church  in  the  Roman 
Empire. 


12  THE  EPISTLE   TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

to  what  has  gone  before.  It  will  be  well  then  first  to 
examine  the  whole  paragraph  in  its  general  sense. 
What  effect,  we  will  ask,  is  prodncecl  on  the  mind  by 
reading  Acts  xvi.  6-10  ?  What  is  the  emphasis  of  the 
paragraph  ?      Here  is  Bishop  Lightfoot's  answer:^ 

"  This  portion  of  St.  Luke's  narrative  is  emphasised 
not  by  any  artifice  of  the  writer,  but  by  the  progress 
of  the  incidents  themselves,  which  all  converge  to  one 
point.  St.  Paul  having  passed  through  the  country 
of  Phrygia  and  Galatia  is  driven  forward  under  the 
divine  guidance  and  in  spite  of  his  own  impulses 
towards  the  shores  of  the  Hellespont.  Attempting  to 
diverge  on  either  side,  he  is  checked  and  kept  in  the 
direct  path.  He  first  looks  wistfully  towards  the 
country  on  his  left,  wishing  to  preach  the  Gospel  in 
the  populous  district  of  Proconsular  Asia.  '  The  Holy 
Spirit  forbids  him'  to  do  so.  He  next  turns  his  steps 
towards  Bithynia  situated  on  his  right,  doubtless  with 
the  same  purpose.  This  attempt  is  as  futile  as  the 
former.  '  The  Spirit  of  Jesus  will  not  permit  it.' 
Thus  hemmed  in  on  either  side,  he  has  no  choice  but 
to  go  forward,  and  so  he  arrives  on  the  coast  of  the 
JEgean.  Here  at  length  the  meaning  of  those  strange 
hindrances,  which  had  thwarted  his  energetic  purpose, 
became  apparent.  God's  providence  has  destined  him 
for  a  nobler  mission- field.  While  at  Troas  gazing  on 
the  sight  of  the  opposite  shores  of  Europe,  he  receives 
an  intimation  which  decides  him.  He  sees  a  vision  in 
the  night.  A  man  of  Macedonia  stands  before  him 
and  entreats  him :  '  Come  over  and  help  us.'  He 
considers  this  as  an  indication  of  the  will  of  God,  and 

1  Biblical  Essays,  p.  237. 


LOCALITY  OF  CHURCHES   OF  GALATIA.      13 

in  obedience  thereto  he  crosses  the  narrow  sea  which 
separates  Asia  from  Europe.  In  this  way  St.  Luke 
forces  upon  our  notice  the  importance  of  this  visit  to 
Macedonia.'' 

The  italics  are  the  present  w^riter's.  It  will  be 
understood  that  he  does  not  quote  this  passage  in  full 
because  he  adopts  all  its  statements  in  detail,  but 
because  the  whole  passage  recognises  that  the  emphasis 
of  Acts  xvi.  6-10  is  on  the  visit  to  Macedonia.  And 
Professor  Eamsay  acknowledges  no  less  than  Lightfoot 
that  the  stress  lies  here.  He  says :  ^  "It  is  not  easy 
to  account  on  strictly  historical  grounds  for  the 
emphasis  laid  on  the  passage  to  Macedonia.  Lightfoot, 
in  his  fine  essay  on  "  the  Churches  of  Macedonia," 
recognises  with  his  usual  insight  that  it  is  necessary  to 
acknowledge  and  to  explain  that  emphasis ;  but  his 
attempts  cannot  be  called  successful." 

Here  we  have  a  distinct  point  of  agreement  which 
extends  further  to  a  readiness  on  the  part  of  both 
the  Bishop  and  the  Professor  to  adopt  the  reading  of 
the  inferior  MSS.,  viz.  Sie\66vT€<i  for  the  SitjXOov  of  the 
great  MSS.^  This  reading  is  thought  to  heighten  the 
effect  of  the  paragraph  which  they  both  describe,  and 
to  have  the  advantage  over  SirjXOov  on  the  ground 
of  transcriptional  probability.  The  reading  SiriXOov 
Lightfoot  says,  "  is  open  to  suspicion  as  an  attempt  to 
simplify  the  grammar  of  a  sentence  rendered  awkward 
by  the  accumulation  of  participles."  ^ 


1  St.  Paul  the  Traveller,  pp.  198,  199. 

2  Biblical  Essays,  p.  23 
i]\dov  is  read  by  t^ABCl 

^  Biblical  Essays,  p.  23'/ 


^Biblical  Essays,  p.  237  note  ;  St.  Paul  the  Traveller,  pp.  195  ff., 
8LT]\dov  is  read  by  t^ABCDE. 


14  THE  EPISTLE    TO    THE    GALATIANS. 

We  must  not  of  course  summarily  dismiss  the 
reading  SirjXOov  in  favour  of  the  participle.^  Our  only 
honest  course  is  to  inquire  into  the  meaning  of  v.  6 
with  each  reading  in  turn ;  the  meaning,  that  is,  so  far 
as  it  affects  the  solution  of  the  problem  of  the  locality 
of  the  churches  of  Galatia. 

Let  us  then  first  suppose  that  SieXOopre^  is  what 
St.  Luke  wrote.  We  are  then  confronted  by  three 
participial  clauses  before  we  reach  the  finite  verb 
eirelpaXov  {eh  rrjv  l^iOunav  iropevQrjvaL).  The  first  two 
of  these  clauses  are  linked  together  by  no  copula,  so 
that  there  arises  an  uncertainty  as  to  the  dependence 
of  the  second  on  the  first.  Two  possible  translations 
of  the  passage  suggest  themselves : 

(A)  And  having  jJcissed  through  the  Phrygo-Galatian 
region,  hecausc  they  were  forhidden  hy  the  Holy  Ghost  to 
speak  the  luord  in  Asia,  and  having  come  over  against 
Mysia  they  were  assaying  to  go  into  Bithynia,  etc. 

(B)  And  having  passed,  through  the  Phrygo-Galatian 
region,  {andY  having  heen  forhidden  hy  the  Holy  Ghost 
to  speak  the  word  in  Asia,  and  having  come  over  against 
Mysia  they  were  assaying  to  go  into  Bithynia,  etc. 

In  (A)  the  participial  clause  is  retrospective,  and  in 
(B)  it  is  not.  It  is  proposed  now  to  show  that  the 
second  rendering  is  likely  to  be  correct. 

And  logic  requires  that  we  should  now   admit  no 

^  For  our  own  part  we  see  no  reason  why  dieXdoures  may  not  have 
been  substituted  for  dLTjXdov  instead  of  the  reverse.  Our  reasons  will 
appear  later.     See  chapter  iii. 

2  We  can  of  course  do  without  the  copula  if  we  render  "And  being 
forbidden  by  the  Holy  Ghost  after  they  had  passed  through  the 
Phrygo-Galatian  region  to  speak  the  word  in  Asia,  etc." 


LOCALITY  OF  CHURCHES   OF  GALATIA.      15 

argument  in  favour  of  (B)  if  such  argument  is  based  on 
any  special  interpretation  of  the  phrase  rhv  ^pvylav  kqi 
TaXariKrjv  yuipav.  It  is  true  that  the  present  writer 
thinks  (B)  better  than  (A)  on  the  ground  that  (B) 
gives  a  reasonable  interpretation  of  this  disputed 
phrase,  more  reasonable,  that  is,  than  (A)  can  give. 
But  were  he  to  base  his  preference  for  (B)  on  this,  he 
would  be  guilty  of  unfairness,  and  the  argument  would 
be  nothing  advanced.  He  has  already  said  which 
interpretation  of  rriv  ^pvylav  Km  TaXaTiKt]v  yoopav  he 
would  prefer  on  a  priori  grounds.  The  point  now  is  : 
How  far  does  such  interpretation  compare  with  others 
in  harmonising  with  the  context  ?  Of  course  the 
writer's  preferred  interpretation  will  suit  the  context 
admirably  and  better  than  any  other,  if  the  context  be 
taken  to  be  (B)  rather  than  (A),  on  the  ground  that  (B) 
gives  the  very  interpretation  to  the  disputed  phrase  he 
wishes  it  to  have  1  Unless  then  (B)  is  to  be  preferred 
to  (A)  on  other  grounds  we  are  no  nearer  to  the 
solution  of  the  original  problem. 

But  this  exclusion  of  a  special  interpretation  of  the 
Phrygo-Galatian  region  does  not  require  that  we  should 
write  this  phrase  an  absolutely  unknown  x.  We  must 
remember  that  the  special  interpretations  of  .the  phrase, 
though  they  are  opposed  one  to  the  other,  may  yet 
have  something  in  common  which  it  is  permissible  to 
give  the  phrase.  This  reservation  will  be  understood 
shortly. 

We  propose  now  to  argue  that  (B)  is  to  be  preferred 
to  (A)  on  these  grounds  : 

1.  Because  the  rendering  (B)  is  in  accordance  with 
St.  Luke's  general   use  of  two  participles  without  a 


16  THE   EPISTLE    TO    THE   GALATL4XS. 

copula,  and,  in  particular,  that  it  can  be  paralleled 
by  the  rendering  of  another  passage  similar  to  this 
one,  and  about   which  there  is  no  ambicfuitv. 

2.  Because,  had  (A)  been  what  St.  Luke  meant, 
it  is  likely  he  would  have  expressed  it  differently. 

3.  Because  the  emphasis  which  the  whole  passage 
is  admittedly  designed  to  express,  is  better  expressed 
by  (B)  than  by  (A). 

-i.   Because  (B)  takes  account  of  verbal  distinctions 
in    the   passage   which    are   confused   by    (A). 
These  four  propositions  must  now   be  justified. 

1.  A  long  quotation  has  already  been  given  from 
Bishop  Lightfoot's  Biblical  Essays,  which  makes  it 
clear  that  he  recognised  that  there  is  no  special 
emphasis  laid  on  the  passing  through  the  Phrygo- 
Galatian  region  ;  and  obviously  this  fact  is  even  less 
emphasised  if  ^/eX^oVre?  be  read  according  to  our 
present  hypothesis,  instead  of  SiJJXOov.  Can  we  then 
find  another  passage  in  the  Acts,  in  which  the  writer 
hurries  over  ground  to  give  emphasis  to  some  point  he 
is  working  for,  to  reach  some  place  where  he  would 
pause  ?  Such  a  passage,  if  it  could  be  found,  should 
by  preference  be  contained  in  that  part  of  his  narrative 
which  deals  with  the  missionary  journeys  of  St.  Paul. 
Here  is  what  we  want : 

Acts  xviii.  22,  23.  koI  KareXOcoi'  ezV  Is^aiaraplav, 
avajBa^  kul  aG-na<TaiJ.evo<;  Trji/  eKK\t](Tiai',  KaTeStj  ei^ 
'Ai^Tio-^eiav,  Koi  ironjcra^  -^ovov  tlvol  e^tjXOei',  Siep-^6- 
fxevo?  KaOe^jj^  rrji'  TaXaTiKi]v  y^wpav  kui  ^pvyiai', 
(TTtjpLi^aiDv  TrdvTcig  tov?  /uLaO}]Td9.  This  passage  is 
chosen  for  its  first  sentence  only.     The  meaning  of 


LOCALITY  OF  CHURCHES   OF  G ALALIA.      17 

VuXaTLKo^  in  the  latter  verse  has  nothing  to  do  with 
our  present  purpose.  This  will  be  considered  in 
chapter  iv. 

The  interest  of  the  third  missionary  journey,  which 
is  here  entered  upon,  centres  in  Ephesus.  It  is 
thither  St.  Luke  is  hastening  us.  He  sums  up  very 
briefly  the  movements  of  the  Apostle  between  his 
second  journey  and  the  third,  and  his  movements  on 
the  third  journey  until  he  has  reached  Ephesus. 
Now  verse  22,  above  quoted,  resembles  xvi.  6,  7,  in 
the  use  of  three  participles,  which  are  related  one 
to  another  similarly  in  the  two  passages.  There  is 
no  copula  to  link  the  second  with  the  first  in  either 
case. 

But  besides  this  particular  case  where  we  have 
three  participles,  there  are  several  instances  in  the 
Acts  of  two  participles  being  used  without  any  copula, 
and  in  each  case,  the  second  of  the  two,  so  far  from 
explaining  the  first,  follows  it  in  point  of  time,  or 
adds  some  simultaneous  action  to  that  expressed  by 
the  first.  In  no  case,  that  is,  is  the  second  participle 
retrospective.  Thus :  6  ^e  IlafAo?  erf  ir poa fxe'iva'^ 
>]ixepa^  IKUU'.'?  T019  aSeXcpoh  aTroTa^djuievo^  e^ewXei  eig 
T}]v  ^vpLuv  (Acts  xviii.  18a). 

"  And  Paul,  having  tarried  after  this  many  days, 
took  his  leave  of  the  brethren  and  sailed  thence  into 
Syria." 

It  will  be  noticed  that  this  particular  verse  occurs 
not  many  lines  before  the  one  with  the  triple  par- 
ticiple already  quoted.  It  may  be  said  to  belong  to 
the  same  paragraph,  a  paragraph  which  is  characterised 
by  a  summary  treatment  of  its  subject. 

B 


18  THE  EPISTLE    TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

Again  in  xxvii.  13,  we  have:  \\)iro'Kvkva-avTo^  Se 
uoTOu]  S6^avT6?  TrJ9  irpoOecrecog  KeKpartjKepai  apavTe<i 
dcrcrov   irapeKeyovTO   Trjv   Ivpy'jTtjv. 

"  Supposing  they  had  obtained  their  purpose,  they 
weighed  anchor  and  sailed  along  Crete,  close  in  shore." 

A  very  good  instance  and  one  that  occurs  in  a 
passage  characterised  by  some  excitement  is  to  be 
found  in  xiv.  14.  aKova-ai^re?  Se  ol  airoarToXoi  ^ap- 
vd^a9  Kcxi.  UavXo'?,  Siapp^'j^aureg  to.  l/uLOLTia  kavToav 
€^€7r})Sr]arav  e(V  tov  o')(\ov,  KpouCpvTeg  kul  Xeyovre^  k.tX. 

"  And  when  the  Apostles,  Barnabas  and  Paul,  heard 
of  it,  they  rent  their  garments  and  sprang  forth  among 
the  multitude,  etc." 

And  a  quieter  instance  occurs  in  xx.  1.  julctu.  Se  to 
TravcracrOai  tov  Oopv^ov  jULeraTreiuyf/a/uievog  6  JlauXo'? 
T0V9  /maOijTag  Kai  TrapaKaXea-ag  ctcrTracra/xevo?  e^ijXOev 
TropeueaOaL   eiV   M^aKeoovlav. 

"  And  after  the  uproar  was  ceased,  Paul  having 
sent  for  the  disciples  and  exhorted  them,  took  leave 
of  them  and  departed  for  to  go  into  Macedonia." 

Lastly  xviii.  23,  quoted  already,  has  Siep^^o/mepog  and 
orrrjpl'^cov  not  coupled  together  except  by  the  obvious 
sense  of  the  verse,  cmjpi'^^ooi/,  it  is  true,  does  not 
express  an  action  following  on  that  expressed  by 
Siep-)(^6iuL€i/o9  in  point  of  time ;  rather,  the  two  actions 
are  simultaneous ;  yet  the  second  participle  is  in  no 
sense  retrospective. 

On  the  other  hand,  is  there  a  single  instance  where 
two  participles  are  used  without  a  copula,  the  second 
being  intended  in  explanation  of  the  first  ? 

2.  Had  St.  Luke  meant  (A)  he  v/ould  have  ex- 
pressed himself  differently.      In  support  of  this  state- 


LOCALITY  OF  CHURCHES   OF  GALATIA.     19 

ment  witness :  Keipd/mepo?  ev  K€V)(^peah  rhv  /ce^aX>/i/, 
€Lxev  yap  ev^yv.  (xviii.  18).  The  expression  of  this 
leads  one  to  think  that  we  should  have  had  for  xvi.  6, 
SieXOovre'?  Se  t?V  ^pvyiav  koI  TaXaTiKi]v  )^copav,  eKW- 
XvOrjcrav  yap  viro  tov  aylov  Trvev/ixaTog  XaXrja-ai  tov 
\6yov  ev  Tij  'Aa-ta,  eXOovTC^  Se  Kara  rhv  Mucr/aj/ 
eirelpa^ov  k.t.X. 

We  may  notice  that  the  words  quoted  above  from 
xviii.  18,  in  which  an  explanation  of  the  conduct 
expressed  by  the  participial  clause  K€ipd/Li€Po<;  ev 
K.ev)(^peaig  t}]v  K€(paX}'jv  is  given  by  means  of  the 
parenthetical  el-^^ev  yap  ev')Q']v,  and  not  by  another 
participial  clause  such  as  e^oiv  ev^]v,  form  the  latter 
part  of  a  verse  of  which  the  former  part  has  been 
already  quoted  to  illustrate  the  use  of  two  participles 
not  connected.  The  difference  of  expression  in  the 
one  verse  is  so  striking  that  it  may  be  quoted  in  full : 
6  (^e  XlauXo?,  eTL  Trpocimelva^  Jjjmepa^  LKavdg  TOig  dSeXcpoh 
a7roTa^a/uL€uo9  e^eTrXei  eig  Ti]v  ^vplai'. .  .Keipajuepo^  ev 
l^ev^peah  Trjv  KeCpaXi'jv,  ely^ev  yap  ev^i'jv. 

3.  Next,  (B)  must  be  preferred  to  (A)  on  the 
ground  that  it  better  suits  what  is  recognised  to  be 
the  main  emphasis  of  the  passage.  What  that 
emphasis  is,  Lightfoot  and  Eamsay  are  agreed.  It 
is  to  Macedonia  that  St.  Luke  hurries  us.  The 
Apostle's  course  was  divinely  ordered,  and  so  clearly 
marked  at  each  stage  that  he  could  not  fail  in  the 
sequel  to  observe  how  providential  all  had  been.  St. 
Luke  realises  this,  and  would  have  his  readers  realise 
how  divinely  ordered  were  all  the  circumstances  which 
led  the  Apostle  on  from  the  scenes  of  his  first 
missionary   labour   to    a   new    sphere ;    hurrying   him 


20  THE  EPISTLE    TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

through  Asia  (or  perhaps  past  it)/  forbidding  him 
to  preach  there,  checking  his  intentions  of  entering 
Bithynia,  directing  him  westward  rather  than  north- 
ward, and,  when  his  face  was  turned  towards  the  west, 
urging  him  not  to  stay  in  Mysia,  but  to  continue 
without  delay  to  the  sea,  which  a  vision  directed  him 
to  cross. 

This  emphasis  seems  to  be  better  maintained  by 
making  the  three  participles  express  the  sequence 
of  events  in  rapid  succession  rather  than  that  one 
of  the  participial  clauses  should  make  us  pause  to  look 
back.  Had  we  been  meant  to  look  back  some  more 
sure  way  of  inviting  us  to  do  so  would  have  been 
found. 

4.  Lastly,  (B)  takes  account  of  verbal  distinctions 
in  the  passage  which  are  confused  by  (A).  For 
according  to  (A)  the  prohibition  of  the  Spirit  against 
preaching  the  word  in  Asia  is  given  as  the  cause  of 
passing  through  the  Phrygo-Galatian  region.  In  this 
case  then  St.  Paul  and  his  company  did  not  enter 
Asia  at  all.  This  of  course  follows  whatever  be 
meant  by  Tr\v  ^puytav  koi  TaXariKrjv  "xy^puv ;  for 
without  giving  any  special  interpretation  to  the  phrase, 
which  we  are  precluded  from  doing  (p.  15),  we  are 
yet  permitted  to  assume  that  it  was  no  part  of  Asia. 
So  then  if  St.  Luke  says  that  the  missionary  band 
passed  through  the  Phrygo-Galatian  region  because 
they  were  forbidden  to  speak  the  word  in  Asia,  it 
is  plain  that  the  sense  of  the  statement  is  that  they 
went    through    some    district   not   Asia    because   they 

^It  would  be  unfair  to  intrude  any  South  Galatian  conclusion, 
until  we  have  established  it.     That  is  why  this  bracket  is  inserted. 


LOCALITY  OF  CHURCHES   OF  GALATIA.     21 

were  forbidden  to  speak  the  word  in  Asia.  In  this 
case  the  Holy  Ghost's  prohibition  against  preaching 
in  Asia,  is  taken  by  St.  Paul  and  his  companions 
to  mean  that  they  ought  not  to  enter  Asia  at  all. 
No  real  distinction  is  made  between  speaking  the  word 
in  and  entering  Asia.  That  is  to  say,  the  distinction 
which  is  marked  in  the  narrative  between  the  pro- 
hibition in  regard  to  Asia  and  Bithynia  respectively — 
for,  while  sjjeciking  the  icord  only  is  forbidden  in  Asia, 
they  may  not  enter  Bithynia  at  all — is  wholly  dis- 
regarded if  we  adopt  (A). 

On  the  other  hand  (B)  preserves  the  distinction. 
For  it  does  not  make  the  prohibition  imposed  by  the 
Holy  Ghost  a  reason  for  their  going  through  the 
Phrygo-Galatian  region.  But  the  prohibition,  at  least 
so  far  as  obedience  to  it  on  their  part  is  concerned, 
followed  the  passage  through  the  ^pvylav  koi  TaXariKt]!/ 
■)((x)pav.  That  is  to  say,  while  the  prohibition  may 
have  become  known  to  them  as  they  were  passing 
through  this  region,  it  only  affected  their  conduct 
eifter  the  region  was  passed.  And  the  way  in  which 
it  affected  their  movements  was  that  they  abstained 
from  preaching  in  Asia  but  not  from  entering  it.  The 
sense  of  the  paragraph  is  in  this  case : 

After  they  had  passed  through  the  Phrygo-Galatian^ 
region  they  were  forbidden  to  speak  the  word  in  Asia 
and  so  had  to  go  forward  without  preaching,  (or  having 
been  forbidden  to  speak  the  word  in  Asia,  they  had 
to   go    forward    without   preaching,)    which    they    did 

^The  participial  KuXvOeures  may  as  suggested  before  be  retained  in 
translation  if  we  render  :  A^id  being  forlndden  hy  the  Holy  (Utost 
after  they  had  yone  through  the  Phrygo-Galatian  region  to  speak  the 
word  ill  A'iia,  etc.  and  having  come  over  agaim^t  Myda  they  icere,  etc. 


22  THE  EPISTLE    TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

until  they  came  over  against  Mysia.  Here  they  were 
assaying  to  journey  to  Bithynia,  but  the  Spirit  of 
Jesus  suffered  them  not ;  and  passing  by  Mysia 
(where  they  could  not  preach,  for  it  was  part  of  Asia 
in  which  speaking  the  word  was  forbidden),  they 
came  to  Troas. 

Exception  may  be  taken  to  the  rendering  forbidden 
for  KcoXvOevTeg,  which  might  mean  hindered.  The 
nature  of  this  prohibition  will  be  considered  later. 
The  word  might  mean  hindered,  and  in  this  case  the 
hindrance  must  be  understood  to  hold  good  when 
the  travellers  came  over  against  Mysia.  Otherwise 
there  is  no  accounting  for  their  conduct  in  regard 
to  Mysia.  The  narrative  clearly  implies  that  they 
did  not  go  through  Mysia  for  preaching,  which  would 
have  been  expressed  by  ^Le\66vTe<i ;  for  it  says  that 
they  passed  it  by,  that  is,  left  it  out,  as  we  say.^ 

This  consideration  that  the  prohibition  against 
speaking  the  word  in  Asia  seems  to  have  held  good 
when  the  travellers  were  Kara  rrjj/  Mva-lav,  and  that 
yet  it  did  not  deter  them  from  crossing  Mysia,  which 
was  itself  part  of  Asia,^  strengthens  our  impression 
that  there  was  a  real  distinction  between  the  Spirit's 
prohibition  in  regard  to  Asia  and  Bithynia  respectively. 
If    the    distinction     were    not    intended,    this    fourth 

^St.  Paul  the  Traveller,  p.  196,  "neglecting  Mysia."  "Leaving 
out "  seems  better,  but  only  because  there  is  a  suggestion  of  moral 
delinquency  in  neglect.  "  Passing  liy  "  is  quite  good,  though  am- 
biguous. 

2  Dean  Farrar  makes  Asia  =  Lydia  and  not  the  whole  of  proconsular 
Asia.  I  have  assumed  with  Lightfoot,  Ramsay,  Conybeare  and 
Howson,  etc. ,  that  proconsular  Asia  is  meant.  See  Farrar's  Life  and 
IVork  of  St.  Paul,  vol.  i.,  p.  464.  I  have  returned  to  this  point  at 
the  end  of  chapter  iii. 


LOCALITY  OF  CHURCHES   OF  GALATIA.      23 

reason  for  preferring  (B)  to  (A)  would  be  non-existent. 
But  our  argument  is  that  it  is  real,  and  that  (B) 
preserves  it  while  (A)  ignores  it. 


We  claim  now  to  have  made  good  our  proposition 
that  if  ^lekQovTe^  be  the  correct  reading,  the  clause 
ATcoXu^ei/re?  /c.r.X.  is  not  retrospective.  It  remains  then 
to  discover  what  is  meant  by  the  Phrygo-Galatian 
region :  that  is,  we  have  to  decide  between  one  of 
Lightfoot's  two  suggested  interpretations,  and  the  one 
that  Professor  Ramsay  offers. 

There  cannot  be  the  least  doubt  that  Professor 
Ramsay's  explanation  gives  excellent  sense.  According 
to  it  the  clause  oieXOovTeg  tyjv  ^pvy'iav  kol  TaXariK^v 
XO)pciv  sums  up  the  journey  over  the  old  ground  after 
Lystra  was  left  and  Iconium  reached.  It  is  remark- 
able that  in  his  account  of  the  first  missionary 
journey,  St.  Luke  (Acts  xiii.  49)  speaks  of  the  spread 
of  the  word  throughout  all  the  region  about  Antioch 
(Si€(pep€TO  Se  6  Xoyog  too  Ivvplov  Si'  oXrjg  rtj^  X^P^^)' 
This  X'^P^'  called  Phrygo-Galatian  in  xvi.  6,  would 
include  Iconium  and  Antioch,  which  places,  it  is  to 
be  noticed,  have  not  been  specially  mentioned  in 
the  opening  verses  of  chapter  xvL,  except  in  an  allusion 
to  the  brethren  in  Iconium,  in  connection  with  the 
choice  of  Timothy.  When  then  St.  Luke  wrote 
SieXOovre?  Trjv  ^pvy'iav  koi  ToXaTiKrjv  X^P^^  ^®  might 
quite  well  mean :  When  they  had  completed  their 
journey  over  the  old  ground.  This  makes  good  sense 
of  xvi.  6  and  connects  it  properly  with  what  has  gone 
before. 


24  THE  EPISTLE    TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

On  the  other  hand,whatof  Lightfoot's  interpretations? 
According  to  both  of  these,  the  Phrygo-Galatian  region 
was  new  ground,  inckiding,  in  either  case,  some  part  of 
Galatia  proper.  Now  it  is  acknowledged  by  supporters 
of  the  North  Galatian  theory  that  this  was  an  unlikely 
route  to  take,^  and  one  that  we  should  not  have 
expected  to  be  taken  unless  there  were  some  special 
reason.  No  reason  is  given  in  the  Acts  ;  for  we  have 
decided  that  the  KcoXvOepre^  clause  is  not  retrospective. 
A  reason  may  be  found  in  the  words  of  Gal.  iv.  13  ; 
and  it  is  suggested  that  St.  Paul  went  into  Galatia  on 
account  of  illness.  But  we  may  ask  whether  any 
reason  can  be  assigned  why  a  sick  or  weak  man  should 
diverge  from  his  natural  route  to  go  to  an  out-of-the- 
way  and  semi-barbarous  region.  That  St.  Paul  having 
once  gone  to  North  Galatia  might  be  cletained  there  by 
sickness,  it  is  reasonable  enough  to  believe ;  but  that 
he  should  ever  go  there  first  of  all  because  of  a  bodily 
ailment  or  weakness  is  highly  improbable. 

For  the  present  then  we  are  impelled  to  the 
conclusion  that  on  the  hypothesis  that  ^LeXQovre^  is 
what  St.  Luke  wrote,  this  passage  does  not  give  any 
foundation  for  the  theory  that  St.  Paul  visited  North 
Galatia  on  his  second  missionary  journey. 

We    next   inquire   into    the    force    of   the   reading 

^  See  Dean  Farrar  in  footnote  of  pages  given  above. 


CHAPTEE    III. 

THE   MEANING  OF  Ta\aTiK6s   IN  ACTS  XVI.   6  WHEN 
OLrjXdop   IS   EEAD. 

OuE  hypothesis  now  is  that  SirjXOov  is  what  St.  Luke 
wrote,  and  our  first  concern  is  to  try  to  determine  the 
relation  of  the  participial  clause  KwXvOevre^  k.t.X.  to 
the  context.  We  want  to  decide  whether  it  is  re- 
trospective or  not ;  whether  or  not  it  gives  the  reason 
why  the  travellers  passed  through  the  Phrygo-Galatian 
region. 

Now  it  will  be  understood  at  once  by  those  who 
have  followed  the  argument  given  above  in  favour  of 
the  non-retrospective  character  of  the  /cwXu^eVre?  clause 
when  Sie\06vT€^  was  taken  to  be  the  true  readinQ-  that, 
of  the  four  reasons  there  given  for  refusing  to  consider 
the  participle  to  be  retrospective,  the  first  two  do  not 
apply  now.  These  depend  for  their  cogency  entirely 
on  the  reading  SieXOovre^,  which  is  now  excluded.  On 
the  other  hand,  the  other  two  reasons  there  given  hold 
now  as  then.  That  is  to  say,  if  grammar  will  permit 
of  the  non-retrospective  interpretation  of  the  KcoXuOevreg 
clause,  such  interpretation  is  to  be  preferred  on  the 
ground  that  it  preserves  the  distinction  between  the 


26  THE  EPISTLE    TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

prohibitions  of  the  Spirit  in  regard  to  Asia  and  Bithynia 
respectively,  and  that  it  is  congenial  to  the  main  tenor 
of  the  passage.  It  becomes  necessary  now  to  in- 
vestigate this  point  of  grammar,  and  this  must  be  done 
with  a  due  regard  for  St.  Luke's  general  usage. 

That,  as  a  matter  of  grammar,  KoAvOei^reg  may  be 
taken  retrospectively  cannot  be  denied.  It  is  true 
that  St.  Luke's  general  habit  is  to  place  his  participial 
clauses  before  the  finite  verb  of  their  sentence,  when 
such  clauses  express  an  action  preceding  in  point  of 
time  that  which  the  finite  verb  is  intended  to  express, 
but  such  usage  is  certainly  not  without  exception,  as 
witness  Acts  xv.  40,  41.  IlayXo?  ^e  eTriXe^dimei^o?  S/Xai/ 
e^rfKOeif  irapaooQei^  Trj  "yapLTL  tou  kvoiov  vtto  twv 
aSeXcjjwv.  In  this  sentence  one  naturally  supposes  that 
TrapaSoOeh  k.t.X.  precedes  in  point  of  time  St.  Paul's 
going  forth,  though,  it  is  to  be  noticed,  that  it  is  in  no 
way  suggested  that  the  commendation  of  him  to  the 
grace  of  the  Lord  on  the  part  of  the  brethren  was  the 
cause  of  his  going  forth.  We  might  even  paraphrase 
and  say  that  he  went  forth  with  the  blessing  of  the 
brethren  upon  him.  Further,  one  cannot  but  think 
that  had  eTriXe^djuieuog  been  absent  from  the  sentence, 
TrapaSoOeh  k.t.X.  would  have  preceded  e^rjXOeu} 

At  the  same  time  it  must  be  acknowledged  that  the 
participle  is  used  after  the  finite  verb  even  when  no 
other  participle  has  preceded  it  in  the  sentence,  and 
that  too  retrospectively.  An  example  is  to  be  found 
in  Acts  xii.  2  5  :  Bapvd/Bag  Se  ko.).  XavXo9  v-jrecrTpe^ai' 
e^  'lepova-aXi]ju  ttXt] puxravTeg  Trjv  SiaKOviav,  crvvirapoXa- 
/SovTeg  'Icoavrji'  tov  eiriKXtjOevTa  MdpKOv. 

^  Compare  xiii.  4, 


LOCALITY  OF  CHURCHES   OF  GALATL4.     27 

If  we  thus  read  e^  before  'lepovcraX^jiuL  there  can  be 
no  doubt  that  the  fulfilment  of  the  SiuKoula  expressed 
by  irK>]pod(TavTe<i  k.tX.  precedes  in  point  of  time  the 
return  expressed  by  the  finite  verb  virea-rpe^av.  It 
might  even  be  taken  as  the  cause  of  the  return.  The 
clause  introduced  by  a-uvirapaXa^ovreg  would  seem 
rather  to  add  a  new  fact  to  the  return  than  to  express 
an  action  preceding  it.  If  ei9  be  read  for  e^  it  is  not 
so  clear  that  7r\i]pcocravT€^  is  retrospective,  but  it  is 
unnecessary  to  discuss  this.  It  is  likely  that  Hort's 
suggestion  is  correct  and  that  the  real  reading  is  t>;j^ 
ek   'lepov(Ta\t]iui   irXt] pwcravTeg   SiaKOvlav. 

In  xxiv.  22  we  have  an  example  of  a  retrospective 
participial  clause  about  which  there  can  be  no  doubt. 
ave^dXero  Se  avrov^  6  ^tjXi^,  aKpi/Secrrepov  eiSm  to. 
Trep).  rrj^  oSov,  eiirag  k.t.X.  Here  the  more  accurate 
knowledge  that  Felix  had  is  clearly  given  as  the  reason 
for  his  action  as  expressed  by  ai/e^dXero  which  has  in 
the  order  of  the  sentence  preceded  the  participial  clause. 
At  the  same  time  it  is  doubtful  whether  eiScog  would 
have  followed  the  finite  verb  if  6  ^ijXi^  had  not  done 
so  too. 

We  need  not  now  give  other  instances.  They  are 
not  numerous  in  comparison  with  participial  clauses 
preceding  the  verb  in  the  sentence,  but  we  have 
enough  to  go  on  to  show  that  the  KcoXvOevre^  clause 
of  xvi.  6  may  quite  well,  as  a  matter  of  grammar, 
and  in  accordance  with  St.  Luke's  occasional  usage, 
be  retrospective.  Taking  it  as  such  we  may  render 
thus : 

And  they  passed  through  the  Phrygo-Gcdatian  region 
because  they  were  forbidden  by  the  Holy  Ghost  to  speak 


28  THE  EPISTLE    TO    THE  GALATIANS. 

the  ivord  in  Asia,  and  tvhen  they  came  over  against  Mysia 
they  were  assaying  to  go  into  Bithynia,  etc.,  etc. 

Wq  have  arrived  at  this  rendering  on  purely 
grammatical  grounds,  as  a  possibility  but  by  no  means 
a  certainty.  It  becomes  necessary  now  to  examine  the 
sense  of  the  passage.  What  we  want  to  come  at  is 
the  meaning  of  the  Phrygo-Galatian  regio7i.  On  our 
present  hypothesis  of  the  retrospective  force  of  kcoXv- 
Oei'Tcg  this  region  was  entered  by  St.  Paul  and  his 
companions  because  they  might  not  preach  the  word 
in  Asia.  This  being  so  we  cannot  now  argue  that 
North  Galatia  was  an  unlikely  region  for  the  travellers 
to  go  to,  as,  however  out-of-the-way  it  was,  it  was  not 
entered  upon  without  some  reason.  As  one  mission 
field  was  denied  them  they  went  to  another.  Moreover, 
as  we  have  now  a  finite  verb  SirjXOov  in  place  of  a 
participle  SieXOopTeg,  it  is  altogether  more  likely  now 
than  before  that  new  ground  may  be  intended  by  the 
Phrygo-Gcdatian  region.  We  may  then,  for  the  purpose 
of  the  argument,  allow  that  this  region  includes  North 
Galatia. 

Assuming  then  that  Acts  xvi.  6  does  make  possible 
a  visit  to  Galatia  proper,  and  that  too  for  preaching, 
we  must  face  the  following  question:  Is  the  prohibition 
of  the  Spirit  spoken  of  here  the  same  as  that  which  is 
referred  to  by  St.  Paul  in  the  Epistle  to  the  Galatians 
as  an  infirmity  of  the  flesh  ?  That  is  to  say.  Was  the 
hindrance  to  preaching  in  Asia  due  ultimately  to  sick- 
ness which  St.  Paul  was  brought  to  look  upon  as  a 
direct  guidance  from  heaven  ?  Or  v;as  it  independent 
of  any  such  bodily  hindrance?  It  w^ill  be  well  to  clear 
the  ground  on  this  point. 


LOCALITY  OF  CHURCHES   OF  GALATIA.     29 

Dean  Farrar  certainly  seems  to  identify  the  two 
causes,  what  we  may  call  the  KcoXvp.a  of  Acts  xvi.  6 
and  the  aorOeveia  rrjg  arapKo?  of  Gal.  iv.  13.^  It  is 
not  however  clear  whether  such  an  identification  is 
intended  by  all  supporters  of  the  North  Galatian 
theory.  The  present  writer  cannot  refrain  from  a 
suspicion  that  this  school  does  find  some  sort  of  agree- 
ment between  the  statements  of  St.  Luke  and  St.  Paul 
in  regard  to  the  cause  of  the  Apostle's  first  preaching 
to  the  Galatians.  Whether  this  is  so  or  not  the 
confession  of  one  of  them  makes  an  examination  of 
this  point  necessary. 

Let  us  then  first  suppose  that  St.  Paul,  on  account 
of  sickness  or  bodily  infirmity,  which  was  interpreted 
by  the  Spirit  to  be  a  reason  for  not  preaching  the 
word  in  Asia,  turned  .aside  into  Galatia  proper.  What 
we  have  now  to  inquire  is :  Where  did  he  turn  aside  ? 
By  what  route  did  he  reach  Galatia  ?  Did  he  visit* 
Pisidian  Antioch  or  not  on  his  second  missionary 
journey  ?  If  he  did  not  visit  Antioch  we  should 
naturally  expect  from  St.  Luke  some  explanation  ivhy 
he  did  not,  seeing  that  the  Apostle  had  proposed  to 
visit  the  brethren  in  every  city  in  which  he  had 
proclaimed  the  word  of  the  Lord  (Acts  xv.  36).  It  is 
true  that  the  breach  with  Barnabas  occurred  after  this 
proposal  had  been  made,  yet  when  the  two  separated, 
Barnabas  to  go  one  way  and  Paul  another,  it  would 
seem  that  Antioch  would  naturally  fall  to  St.  Paul. 
If  then  he  did  not  go  there  now,  we  have  a  right  to 
expect  a  reason  from   the  historian.      It  may  be  said 

^  This  seems  clear  from  his  footnote  on  p.  4(34  of  Life  and  Wo7'k  of 
Sf.  Paul,  vol.  i. 


80  THE  EPISTLE    TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

that  the  Koi)\vOePT€<t  clause  gives  the  reason.  Be  it  so. 
St.  Paul  understood  that  he  was  not  to  preach  the 
word  in  Asia,  and  so  he  did  not  go  to  Antioch,  for 
then  he  would  have  had  to  go  into  the  part  of  Phrygia 
which  belonged  to  Asia,  so  he  passed  from  Iconium  to 
Galatia.  We  look  at  a  map  and  we  find  that  to  get 
from  Iconium  to  Pessinus,  it  would  have  been  necessary 
for  the  travellers,  if  they  went  by  the  high  road,  to  go 
to  Philomelium  first ;  and  Philomelium  was,  according 
to  Pamsay,  in  Phrygia  Asiana.-^  That  is  to  say,  that 
Antioch,  having  been  avoided  because  of  the  prohibition 
concerning  Asia,  St.  Paul  would  yet  go  into  Asia. 
This  is  clearly  absurd. 

Well  then,  it  may  be  said,  St.  Paul  did  not  go  by 
the  high  road.  "  He  would  not  be  deterred  by  any 
rough  or  unfrequented  paths."  This  last  sentence  is 
Lightfoot's.  Be  it  so.  St.  Paul  went  over  the  moun- 
tains because  he  was  forbidden  to  preach  the  word  in 
Asia.  He  went  over  them,  because  when  he  got  over 
them  he  would  be  where  he  might  preach.  We  ask 
whether  this  is  consistent  with  our  present  hypothesis 
that  the  prohibition  was  due  to  sickness.  A  sick  man 
diverging  from  the  main  road  to  travel  over  rough  and 
unfrequented  paths  !  No  ;  on  the  hypothesis  that  the 
KcoXvjuLa  of  Acts  xvi.  and  the  aaOeveia  rrj^  crapKOS  were 
one  in  effect,  there  is  nothing  for  it  but  to  allow  that 
St.  Paul  did  go  to  Antioch. 

Let  us  then  follow  his  course  from  Antioch.  The 
visit  to  Antioch  itself  is  included  in  xvi.  4,  5,  not,  of 
course,  in  SirjXOov  t^v  ^pvyiav  Kai  TaXariKrjv  -^copav, 
which  is  accounted  for  on  our  present  hypothesis  by 

^  See  map,  Church  in  the  Roman  Umpire. 


LOCALITY  OF  CHURCHES   OF  GALATIA.     31 

the  retrospective  KooXvOevre?  clause.  In  v.  6  we  enter 
on  new  ground.  A  new  X'^P^'  which  we  are  supposing 
to  include  North  Galatia,  is  entered  on,  presumably 
for  j^recccJmig,  for  Asia  is  forbidden  them  for  preaching. 

We  take  then  this  Phrygo-Galatian  region  to  mean 
first  the  one  and  then  the  other  of  Lightfoot's  sugges- 
tions. First  let  it  stand  for  Galatia  proper,  once 
Phrygia  now  so  no  more.  How  did  St.  Paul  get  there 
from  Antioch  ?  He  must  have  gone  through  the  part 
of  Phrygia  which  belonged  to  the  province  of  Asia. 
He  cannot  have  preached  in  this  part,  for  the  prohibi- 
tion is  upon  him  not  to  preach  the  word  in  Asia — the 
prohibition,  that  is,  which  the  Holy  Spirit  interpreted 
his  sickness  to  mean — so  he  hastens  on  to  Pessinus, 
where  he  will  no  longer  be  in  Asia,  and  so  not 
forbidden  to  preach.  Now  it  may  be  unhesitatingly 
said  that  this  is  most  unlikely.  So  unlikely  is  it 
that  a  sick  man  should  take  so  long  a  journey  and  into 
the  "  semi-barbarous  regions  of  Phrygia  and  Galatia," 
that  the  present  writer  must  refuse  to  follow  him 
there. 

So  then  we  try  Lightfoot's  other  suggestion,  and 
interpret  the  Phrygo-Galatian  region  to  be  a  district 
part  of  which  was  Phrygian  and  part  Galatian.  And 
it  must  be  remembered  that  this  is  reached  from 
Antioch  where  we  have  seen  St.  Paul  must  have  gone. 
Which  then  was  the  Phrygian  part  of  the  ywpa"^.  Not 
any  part  of  Phrygia  in  Asia,  for  the  prohibition  against 
preaching  the  word  in  Asia  holds  good.  And  no  other 
part  of  Phrygia  will  do. 

Our  conclusion  then  is,  that  even  if  KcoXvOevre^  be 
retrospective  and  the  North  Galatian  theory  be  correct, 


32  THE  EPISTLE    TO    THE    GALATIANS. 

the  acrOei/eia  rfjg  arapKo^  is  not  the  same  as  the  prohibi- 
tion of  Acts  xvi.  6. 

We  have  not,  in  our  consideration  of  the  possible 
identity  of  the  prohibition  of  the  Spirit  and  the 
acrOeueia  Trjg  orapKog,  allowed  any  a  jy^'iori  reasons  to 
intrude  themselves.  But  now  that  we  have,  on  in- 
dependent grounds,  decided  that  they  are  not  the  same, 
it  may  be  permissible  to  state  emphatically  that  we 
had  every  reason  a  priori  to  expect  that  they  would 
not  prove  to  be  the  same.  To  the  present  writer  it 
seems  a  misuse  of  language  to  speak  of  an  illness  as  a 
prohibition  of  the  Spirit.  At  any  rate  he  does  not 
think  that  St.  Paul,  and  in  consequence  St.  Luke, 
would  have  so  regarded  it.  The  Apostle  was  more 
likely  to  have  looked  upon  it  as  a  hindrance  from 
Satan  (1  Thess.  ii.  18  with  Lightfoot's  note  and  2  Cor. 
xii.  7).  When  then  we  find  St.  Luke  speaking  of  the 
missionary  band  as  K(jo\vdevTe<i  viro  rov  aylov  Tn/evjuarog 
\aXrja-ai  tov  Xoyov  ev  Tt]  A(Tia,  we  prefer  to  give  to  the 
words  a  more  literal  and  natural  meaning,  and  to  plead 
justification  for  so  doing  by  a  reference  to  Acts  xxi.  11. 
The  warning  of  Agabus  delivered  in  the  name  of  the 
Holy  Spirit  (TaSe  Xeyei  to  irveufxa  to  dyiov)  would 
seem  to  suggest  the  manner  in  which  the  prohibition 
of  the  Holy  Spirit  against  preaching  the  word  in  Asia 
was  made  known  to  St.  Paul.  And  it  is  worthy  of 
remark  that  Silas,  who  was  St.  Paul's  companion  on 
his  second  missionary  journey,  was,  like  Agabus,  a 
7rpo(p7jTt]9  (Acts  XV.  32). 

It  remains  for  us  then,  still  allowing  KwXvOei/reg  to 
be  retrospective  and  still  taking  "  the  Phrygo-Galatian 


LOCALITY  OF  CHURCHES   OF  GALATIA.     33 

region "  to  include  North  Galatia,  to  keep  the  pro- 
hibition distinct  from  the  aa-Qeveia  rrj^  (lapm.  The 
prohibition  against  preaching  the  word  in  Asia  was 
one  thing ;  the  sickness  or  bodily  infirmity  which  took 
the  Apostle  to  Galatia,  or  detained  him  there,  was 
another  thing. 

Here  again  the  question  confronts  us :  Did  St. 
Paul  visit  Antioch  on  his  journey,  or  did  he  diverge 
at  Iconium  ?  Let  it  be  supposed  first  that  he  went 
off  at  Iconium,  and  that,  because  he  was  forbidden  to 
preach  the  word  in  Asia.  The  inference  is  that  he 
avoided  Asia  altogether  and  went  over  the  mountains. 
There  is  no  objection  to  this  journey  over  an  un- 
frequented path,  now  that  we  have  distinguished  the 
aarOiveLa  rrj^  (rapKo?  from  the  KcoXvjma  of  the  Holy 
Spirit.  But  if  the  Apostle  avoided  Asia  because  he 
might  not  preach  there,  he  must  have  gone  into  the 
Phrygo-Galatian  region  on  purpose  to  preach.  How, 
we  ask,  is  this  to  be  reconciled  with  the  statement  of 
Gal.  iv.  13,  that  it  was  on  account  of  an  infirmity 
of  the  flesh  that  he  preached  to  the  Galatians  ? 

So  then  we  must  take  the  Apostle  to  Antioch. 
From  there  he  enters  the  Phrygo-Galatian  region 
because  he  might  not  preach  the  word  in  Asia. 
This  region  then  cannot  mean  Phrygia  and  Galatia, 
because  the  Phrygian  part  was  in  Asia.  It  must  then 
mean  Northern  Galatia,  once  Phrygia.  There  St. 
Paul  goes  with  the  deliberate  intention  of  preaching 
because  he  might  not  speak  the  word  in  Asia.  Need- 
less to  say,  this  cannot  be  reconciled  with  St.  Paul's 
statement  in  Gal.  iv.   13. 

There   is   nothing  for  it  then   but   to  give   up  in- 


34  THE  EPISTLE    TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

terpreting  the  KcoXvOevreg  clause  as  retrospective.  If 
it  be  so  taken,  the  passage  leads  to  no  sense  or  fails 
in  consistency  with  Gal.  iv.  13.  The  retrospective 
interpretation  of  the  participle  certainly  does  not 
favour  the  South  Galatian  theory,  but  neither  does 
it  work  in  consistently  with  the  opposite  theory. 
Grammatically  the  construction  is  possible,  but  it  will 
not  bear  the  test  of  a  close  examination  from  a 
logical  point  of  view. 


It  becomes  necessary  now  to  inquire  whether  any 
other  interpretation  of  the  KcoXvOepre^  clause  is  gram- 
matically possible.  Adhering  strictly  to  the  order 
of  the  Greek  we  get  this  rendering.  "  And  they  went 
through  the  Phry go- Galatian  region  forbidden  hy  the 
Holy  Ghost  to  speak  the  vjord  in  Asia,  cicr  It  will 
be  noticed  that  this  differs  from  the  rendering  of  the 
Ee vised  Version  in  an  important  particular ;  for  it 
omits  all  use  of  auxiliary  verbs  to  translate  KcoXvOevreg, 
which  in  the  Revised  Version  is  rendered  having  been 
forbidden.  The  sense  of  the  statement  as  given  in 
the  Eevised  Version  would  remain  the  same  if  we 
wxre  to  invert  the  order  of  the  participial  clause 
and  the  finite  verb  in  translating.  Thus  if  we  read, 
And  having  betn  forbidden  by  the  Holy  Ghost  to  speak 
the  word  in  Asia,  they  went  through  the  Phrygo- 
Gedatiecn  region,  we  apprehend  the  same  fact  as  if 
we  read.  And  they  ivent  through  the  Phrygo-Galeitian 
region,  having  bee7i  forbielden  of  the  Holy  Ghost  to  speech 
the  luord  in  Asia.  But  if,  as  is  now  suggested,  we 
omit  the  auxiliary  words  having  been,  and   take   the 


LOCALITY  OF  CHURCHES   OF  GALATIA.     35 

sentence  to  be  :  "  They  went  through  the  Phrygo- 
Galatian  region  forbidden  by  the  Holy  Ghost  to 
preach  the  word  in  Asia,"  we  may  understand  the 
participial  clause  to  be  predicative,  and  the  predication 
made  by  the  finite  verb  SirjXOov  to  be  incomplete 
without  it.  The  participle  is  grammatically  in  agree- 
ment with  the  subject  of  the  finite  verb,  but  logically 
it  is  an  extension  of  the  predicate.  Further,  it  is  no 
longer  a  matter  of  indifference  whether  the  participle 
precede  or  follow  the  verbal  predicate.  We  see  at 
once  the  difference  between,  They  went  through  the 
Phrygo-GaloMan  region  forbidden  to  preach  the  word  in 
Asia,  and,  Forhidden  to  'preach  the  word  in  Asia,  they 
went  through  the  Phrygo-Galatian  region.  In  the  latter 
rendering  the  participle  is  an  extension  of  the  subject; 
in  the  former,  though  in  agreement  with  the  subject 
grammatically,  it  is,  as  we  have  already  remarked, 
logically  part  of  the  predicate. 

That  the  participle  is  used  predicatively  even  in 
classical  Greek  is  recognised  by  Greek  scholars.  For 
example,  Curtius  speaks  of  that  usage  "  in  which  the 
participle  serves  to  supplement  a  verbal  predicate, 
and  forms  as  such  an  essential  part  of  the  predica- 
tion." And  he  adds :  ''  This  widely  ramifying  use 
to  which  the  Greek  language  is  especially  partial  is 
of  supreme  importance  to  the  pupil."  ^  In  his  Gram- 
mar of  the  Greek  Language  he  gives  examples  of  the 
predicative  participle ;  such  participle,  as  he  says, 
serving  "  to  complete  a  v^erb  by  attributing  to  a  word 
contained   in    the    sentence    something   which   is   not 

^  See  Elucidations  of  the   Student's  Greek   Gramma)-  hy  Curtius, 
translated  by  Evelyn  Abbot  (London,   1870),  pp.  223,  224. 


36  THE  EPISTLE    TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

a  mere  addition,  but  an  essential  part  of  the  state- 
ment." ^ 

Perhaps  the  simplest  and  most  familiar  instance 
of  this  is  the  use  of  Xav^avijo  with  the  participle. 
Thus  (pouea  eXdvOave  /Boo-kmv, — he  was  entertaining  a 
murderer  unaiuares. "  The  real  predicate  here  is 
/SocTKcoi/  and  eXdvOave  is  in  effect  but  an  adverb.  The 
predication  is  incomplete  without  both  the  finite  verb 
and  the  participle.  We  may  compare  (palveTai  avrjp 
aya0o9  cov,  which  means  He  manifestly  is  a  hrave  man, 
a  different  statement  from  that  contained  in  the  words 
(paiveraL  avhp  ayaOog  elvai,  which  would  only  mean 
He  is  considered  to  be  a  hrave  man.  Again,  in  'irv^ov 
TrpoQ-eXOcov  dvSpl  the  participle  is  essential  to  the 
predication,  the  finite  verb  by  itself  being  meaning- 
less. We  might  here  again  render  ervyov  adverbially 
and  say,  By  chance  I  met  a  man.  Indeed  Curtius 
well  says  concerning  this :  "  In  translating  we  fre- 
quently change  the  participle  into  the  principal  verb 
and  render  the  principal  Greek  verb  by  an  adverb."  ^ 

It  is  unnecessary  to  multiply  instances.  The  reader 
may  refer  to  Curtius  Grammar,  where  these  are 
numerous.  Enough  has  been  said  to  show  that  at  an 
early  stage  of  the  language  there  is  already  a  tendency 
for  the  participle  to  become  predicative. 

And  this  tendency  is  specially  marked  in  later  Gh-eek, 
as  any  reader  of  Hellenistic  Greek  must  have  observed 
for  himself.  We  might  almost  say  that  with  the 
historical  writers  of  the  New  Testament  it  has  become 

1  Curtius'  Greek  Grammar  (Smith's  edition,   1867),  p.  319. 

These  examples  are  borrowed  from   Thompson's  Greek  Syntax. 
^  Greek  Grammar,  p.  320. 


LOCALITY  OF  CHURCHES  OF  GALATIA.     3/ 

a  settled  habit  to  use  the  participle  predicatively. 
Here  are  some  examples  selected  more  or  less  at 
random.  KaQ'  rifxepav  ev  tm  lepcp  eKaOe^ojurjv  SiSolctkcov 
(St.  Matt.  xxvi.  55),  where  the  participle  SiSdcrKCfW 
is  logically  inseparable  from  the  verbal  predicate 
eKa6eXoiJ.r]i'.  In  St.  Luke  iii.  3  we  have :  kol  rjXQev 
eh  iracrav  irepi-^Mpov  rod  'lopSdvov  Kijpva-crwu  pdirTLG-iia 
juLeravola?  k.t.\.  Here  the  participial  clause  Krjpva-awv 
K.T.X.  is  the  main  part  of  the  predication,  the  verbal 
predicate  and  its  adjunct  defining  the  locality  in  which 
the  preaching  took  place.  Again  in  Acts  xv.  24  we 
read  :  eireiSt]  rjKOV(TaiJ.€v  otl  rivh  e^  I'jjucop  erdpa^av  vjixag 
\6yoi9  avacTKevd^ovTeg  ra?  xf^iy^a?  vjuloov.  In  this 
passage  dvacrK€vd'(^ovT€9  k.t.X.  is  part  of  the  predicate. 
We  do  not  contend  that  in  this  case  the  participial 
clause  is  the  main  part  of  the  predication,  but  it  is 
supplementary  to  and  explanatory  of  erdpa^av  vjuLug 
Xoyoi'i.  And  in  the  35th  verse  of  the  same  chapter 
we  have:  UauXog  Se  kui  Bapvdl3a<^  Sierpi/Bov  ev  AvTio^eia 
oioaa-KOVTeg  kui  evayyeXi^onxei/oi  k.t.X. 

Nor  is  this  usage  confined  only  to  the  active  and 
middle  participles.  An  instance  of  a  passive  participle 
used  predicatively  occurs  in  Acts  ix.  31,  where  we 
read ;  >J  /mev  ovv  eKKXtjcla  kuO'  oX;/?  t^7?  'lou^a/a?  koi 
VaXiXaiag  koi  'Eajuapiag  elyev  elpijvi^v  oiKOoojuLov/j.ev>]  k.t.X. 

Here  it  seems  reasonable  to  take  oiKoSofxovfxev)]  as 
part  of  the  predicate.  It  being  a  present  or  imperfect 
participle,  and  passive  withal,  it  is  impossible  to  render 
it  in  English  without  an  auxiliary,  and  we  must  say 
being  edified  if  we  would  translate  it  literally.  But 
when  we  have  got  a  literal  translation,  viz.  The  Church 
had  peace  being  edified,  we  ask  whether  this  is  really 


38  THE  EPISTLE    TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

English,  and  whether  it  conveys  the  meaning  intended 
by  the  historian.  Is  not  e/^ej^  eipy'jvrjv  oiKoSojuLovjUievr] 
well  nigh  equivalent  to  eyovcra  €Lp}]pj]v  (pKoSojuieiro  ? 
The  Church  had  peace  and  so  ivas  being  built  up.  It 
was  a  season  of  edification  in  the  literal  sense  of  the 
word  because  one  of  peace.  Our  language  is  too  poor 
to  make  the  one  predication  as  the  Greek  can  do  in 
the  words  el^ev  eip}]vi]v  oiKoSojULovjuiep}'].  But  our  in- 
ability to  render  the  same  in  English  need  not  blind 
us  to  the  force  of  the  Greek  idiom. 

A  similar  instance  of  a  passive  present  participle 
predicatively  used  is  to  be  found  in  St.  Luke  iv.  1, 
Kai  'i]<yeTO  ev  rw  irvevixarL  ev  Tt]  epi'/f/xp  i]jtAepa^  recra-epd- 
Kovra  7reipaCp[j.evo^  viro  rou  Sia/36Xou.  If  we  translate 
literally,  And  he  was  led  in  the  Sioirit  in  the  wilderness 
during  forty  days  being  tempted  of  the  devil,  there  can 
be  no  doubt  that  any  one  reading  this  English  rendering 
would  understand  what  was  meant.  At  the  same 
time  it  is  questionable  whether  this  is  proper  English, 
though  it  is  a  form  of  English  to  which  we  have 
become  somewhat  accustomed  as  the  result  of  literal 
translations  from  the  Greek  of  the  New  Testament. 
But  at  the  same  time  there  cannot  be  the  least  doubt 
that  ireLpaXoiJ.evo<s  is  predicatively  used.  Our  Lord's 
being  led  in  the  Spirit  in  the  wilderness  and  His 
temptation  by  the  devil  are  so  inseparably  connected 
together  that  the  two  are  expressed  in  Greek  by  but 
one  sentence.  The  meaning  is  better  expressed  in 
English,  as  I  venture  to  think,  by  the  omission  of  the 
auxiliary  being.  And  he  vms  led  in  the  Spirit  in  the 
wilderness  during  forty  days  tempted  of  the  devil. 

Nor   again   is   it  present   participles   only  that   are 


LOCALITY  OF  CHURCHES   OF  GALATIA.      39 

predicatively  used  by  St.  Luke.  There  are  several 
instances  of  aorist  participles  so  used.  One  of  the 
most  striking  is  to  be  found  in  Acts  xxv.  13,  where 
we  have  these  words  :  'H/xe^wi/  ^e  Siayevoiuevcop  tlvwv 
'A'ypi7r7ra<f  6  ^aa-iXeu^  kcu  'Bepi'iK)]  KaT)jvT}]G-av  ek 
l^aio-apiav  acrTracrajUiepoi  tov  ^T^cttov. 

"  xsTow  when  certain  days  were  passed,  Agrippa  the 
king  and  Bernice  arrived  at  Caesarea  and  saluted 
Festus." 

The  reading  aa-Tracro/uLeuoi  of  the  Authorised  Version 
has  been  discarded,  the  documental  authority  for 
aa-TracrdiuLevoi  being,  as  Hort  says,  absolutely  over- 
whelming ;  and  he  adds :  "As  a  matter  of  transmission 
-ojuei'oi  can  be  only  a  correction."  Hort  suspects  there 
is  some  prior  corruption  ;  but  ao-Traa-ajULevoi  stands  in 
the  text  on  as  sure  grounds  as  does  SujXOoi^  in  xvi.  6  ; 
indeed,  according  to  Lightfoot,  on  surer  grounds,  for 
probabilities  of  transcription  as  well  as  documental 
authority  favour  ao-Tracrd/uLei'oif  whereas  the  former  are 
in  Lightfoot's  opinion,  wanting  for  SirjXOov}  Con- 
sistently then  with  the  retention  of  SitjXOov  we  must 
keep  ao-Traa-aiuLevoi  and  endeavour  to  interpret  it.  And 
no  interpretation  of  it,  so  far  as  the  present  writer 
can  see,  is  possible,  unless  we  take  it  as  part  of  the 
predicate,  and  understand  that  Agrippa  and  Bernice 
paid  a  Festus-saluting  visit  to  Caesarea.  That  is  to 
say,  their  visit  to  Caesarea  and  saluting  of  Festus  are 
conceived  of  as  one  thing,  though  it  is  practically 
impossible  to  translate  the  Greek  sentence  into  English 
without  the  use  of  two  finite  verbs.  It  is  not  that 
Agrippa    and    Bernice    arrived   at    Caesarea    to   salute 

^  Biblical  E^isays,  p.  237,  footnote. 


40  THE  EPISTLE   TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

Festus.  The  words  KaTrjvTrjarav  eig  ILaia-aplav  aa-iraao- 
^evoL  Tov  ^rjarov  would  have  told  of  a  visit  paid  to 
Caesarea  for  a  purpose,  but  would  not  have  expressed, 
as  the  text  succeeds  in  expressing,  the  carrying  out  of 
that  purpose. 

Very  similar  to  this  use  of  aa-Traa-djuievoi  is  that  of 
eiVa?  in  Acts  xxii.  24  where  we  have:  eKeXevcre}/  6 
X'^^^PX^^  ^^(^(^y^'^Oai  avTov  eh  t^v  irapeiJ-^oKiffv,  e'lirag 
lnacTTL^iv  civeTaYecrdaL  k.tX. 

"  The  chief  captain  commanded  that  he  should  be 
brought  into  the  castle,  and  said  that  he  should  be  ex- 
amined by  scourging." 

The  Eevised  Version  has  lidding  for  efVa?.  But  of 
course  it  does  not  explain  the  participial  construction 
to  translate  eiirag  hiddiiig  or  saying,  any  more  than 
aa-iraa-a^evoi  is  explained  by  translating  it  saluting. 
If  we  wish  to  preserve  the  participial  construction  in 
translation  in  each  case,  we  must  of  couse  render  by  a 
2)Tcscnt  participle,  but,  by  so  doing,  we  have  not  got 
over  the  grammatical  difficulty  of  the  participial 
construction. 

Indeed  in  our  common  usage  of  the  participle  saying 
in  so  simple  a  sentence  as  They  came,  saying  etc.,  which 
has  become  so  familiar  to  us  as  the  result  of  a  literal 
translation  of  the  Greek,  we  are  in  reality  employing 
the  participle  predicatively,  though  our  very  familiarity 
with  this  usage  blinds  us  perhaps  to  its  significance. 
There  is  really  no  difference  in  principle  between 
translating  the  sentence  in  Acts  xxv.  13,  Agrippa  and 
Bernice  arrived  at  Caesarea,  scduting  Festus,  and  rendering 
e'/vra?  /aao-ri^iv  averd'^ea-Oai  by  Melding  thcd  he  should  he 
examined  hy  seoiirging.      We  cannot  express  an  aorist 


LOCALITY  OF  CHURCHES   OF  GALATIA.     41 

active  participle  literally  in  English  by  one  word,  so  in 
order  to  retain  the  participial  form  we  have  to  sacrifice 
the  aorist,  which  we  are  more  ready  to  do  with  eLira^ 
than  with  aa-Traa-djuievoi.  The  present  writer  fails  to 
see  why  corruption  should  be  suspected  in  the  case  of 
acTTraa-diuLei'OL  more  than  in  that  of  e'lirag} 

And  we  have  yet  other  aorist  participles  predicatively 
used  by  St.  Luke.  Thus  in  Acts  xi.  3  0  we  find :  o  koi 
€7roit](Tav  diro(TTei\avTe^  irpog  tou^  irpecr/BuTepov^  ma 
')(€ioo9  Jjapvd^a  koi  llduXou. 

"  Which  also  they  did,  sending  it  to  the  elders  by 
the  hands  of  Barnabas  and  Saul." 

This  is  the  translation  of  the  Eevised  Version.  It 
is  not  easy  to  understand  why  the  Eevisers  were  so 
scrupulous  about  their  marginal  translation  of  ciTraad- 
HievoL  in  xxv.  13  {having  saluted)  when  they  are  ready 
to  render  diroa-TelXavreg  by  sending  in  this  other 
passage.  To  the  present  writer  the  two  cases  seem  to 
be  on  the  same  footing  and  should  be  so  treated.  If 
sending  will  do  here  why  not  saluting  there  ? 

To  come  to  an  examination  of  this  verse.  We  may 
reasonably  say  that  diroG-TeiXavre^  k.t.X.  is  a  part  of 
the  predicate  and  enlarges  on  what  is  expressed  by 
o  Koi.  €7roLr](Tav.  At  first  sight  it  may  seem  that  it 
only  explains  o  kui  eiroujaav  and  that  it  does  not  add 
anything  to  it. .  But,  though  diroa-TelXavTeg  by  itself 
may  add  nothing  to  what  is  already  expressed  by  o  Kai 
eirolrjcrav,  yet  the  whole  participial  clause  certainly  goes 
further.      The  preceding  verse  states  the  determination 

^  It  is  almost  amusing  that  Blass  dismisses  the  aairaadixevoi.  reading 
as  corrupt  ( "  corrupte  paene  omnes  graeci")  and  adopts  the  vulgate 
reading  da-iraaofMei^oL.     See  his  Acta  Apostolorutn. 


42  THE  EPISTLE   TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

of  the  disciples  to  send  relief.  The  words  o  Km  eTroirjo-av 
tell  of  the  carrying  out  of  their  purpose,  and  the 
participial  clause  adds  a  further  statement  describing 
how  the  purpose  was  carried  out. 

So  then,  though  it  is  possible,  without  making 
aTrocrre/Xai/Te?  into  a  finite  verb  and  translating  and 
tlicy  sent,  to  render  it  participially  hy  sending,  it  still 
remains  true  that  the  ciTrocrTelXavTeg  clause  is  a 
part  of  the  predicate,  and  cannot  be  properly  explained 
otherwise. 

We  may  compare  with  this  last  instance  the  use  of 
the  participle  ypd^l^apreg  in  xv.  23.  If  we  supply 
o  KOI  e'Troir](Tav  before  this  otherwise  ungrammatical 
participle  the  two  cases  become  exactly  parallel. 

One  more  example  of  an  active  aorist  participle 
predicatively  used  shall  be  given.  It  must  be  the  last. 
In  Acts  xii.  4  we  have:  ov  kcu  Tridarag  eOero  ek  (pvXuKiji^, 
TTCxpcxSovg  Te(T<jap(TLv  rerpaSiGig  a-TpariooTcov  (puXdara-eiv 
avTOv,  /SovXojUiei/og  jULeTci  to  irda-ya  dvayajelv  avTOV  ro) 
Xacp, 

In  this  passage  irapaSov?  is  rendered  predicatively 
even  in  the  Eevised  Version,  where  we  find  and 
delivered  him.  We  may  remark  too  that  ^ovXo^evog 
is  also  predicative  and  is  practically  equivalent  to  and 
it  was  his  intention.  We  cannot  explain  the  j3ovX6- 
/u.evo'?  clause  as  giving  the  cause  of  Herod's  action 
expressed  by  eOero  eig  (pvXaKi'jp,  though  it  may  give 
the  reason  why  he  did  not  Jdll  Peter  at  once. 

It  is  to  be  feared  that,  to  some  readers,  the  setting 
forth  of  these  many  instances  at  length  may  seem 
tedious.  But  to  the  present  writer  it  has  seemed 
important    to    illustrate    the   point   for   which    he    is 


LOCALITY  OF  CHURCHES   OF  GALATIA.     43 

contending  by  showing  that  the  predicative  use  of  the 
participle  is  natural  to  St.  Luke. 

It  will  be  well  now  to  return  to  our  KwXvOevre^ 
clause,  and  to  examine  whether  the  predicative  sense 
we  seek  to  attach  to  it  can  be  supported  by  other 
passages  resembling  it  in  form.  Let  it  be  noticed  that 
we  have  here  an  active  verb  followed  by  a  passive 
participle.  SiijXOov  Trjv  ^pvyiav  Kai  Ta\aTiKr]v  -^copav 
KcoXvOeuTeg  vtto  tou  ayiov  TTi^ety/xaro?  XaXfjcraL  top 
\6yov  ev  Ti]  'Acr/a.  We  say  that  this  may  mean :  They 
ivent  through  the  Phrygo-Galatian  region  forbidden  by 
the  Holy  Ghost  to  speak  the  word  in  Asia.  That  is  to 
say,  we  seek  to  render  it,  so  as  to  lay  the  main  stress 
on  the  prohibition  against  preaching  the  word  in  Asia. 
Is  this  a  fair  rendering?  Can  we  find  a  parallel  to  it? 
To  these  questions  we  give  an  affirmative  reply  and 
adduce  in  evidence  two  passages  taken  from  the  third 
Gospel,  a  work  generally  agreed  to  be  by  the  same 
author  as  the  Acts  of  the  Apostles. 

It  will  be  best  first  to  quote  these  two  passages  and 
then  to  comment  upon  them. 

1.  Kca  avT09  eotoaarKev  ev  Toig  avvay(jdyai<s  avTwv 
So^a^ojuevog  vtto   iravTcov   (St.  Luke  iv.  15). 

2.  KaTe/Sr]  outo?  SeSiKaiwimei/o^  €19  tov  olkov  avTou 
Trap'  €K€ivov  (St.  Luke  xviii.  14). 

Let  us  look  at  the  first  of  these  two.  "  He  was 
teaching  in  their  synagogues  glorified  of  all."  The 
participial  clause  is  an  essential  part  of  the  predication. 


44  THE  EPISTLE   TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

Leave  out  this  clause  and  the  meaning  of  the  statement 
is  gone.  He  was  teaching  in  their  synagogues  is  not 
what  St.  Luke  says.  The  emphasis,  so  it  seems  to 
me,  is  not  on  the  fact  of  His  preaching  but  on  the 
reception  He  met  with.  A  fame  went  out  concerning 
Him  throughout  all  the  region  round  about.  And 
He  taught  in  their  synagogues  to  the  admiration  and 
approval  of  all.  He  was  welcomed,  approved,  admired, 
glorified  as  He  taught  in  their  synagogues. 

It  would  be  nothing  to  the  purpose  to  object  that 
^o^aXJ>iJ.evo<i  is  an  imperfect  participle  whereas  kwXv- 
Oevre^  is  aorist.  For,  of  course  So^a'(^6iuL€vo<i  is  im- 
perfect just  because  eSlSucTKev  is  imperfect.  "  He 
was  teaching  in  their  synagogues  glorified  of  all." 
The  participle  is  predicative. 

And  if  it  be  an  error  to  suppose  that  the  emphasis 
of  the  sentence  is  on  the  participle  in  the  first  of 
these  two  cases — though  we  do  not  allow  that  it  is — 
there  can  at  any  rate  be  no  mistake  as  to  the  emphasis 
in  the  other  case.  This  man  went  clown  to  his  house 
justified  rather  than  (or,  in  comparison  with)  the  other. 
The  fact  that  the  publican  went  down  to  his  house 
is  of  no  importance  whatever ;  but,  that  he  was 
justified  in  comparison  witli  the  Pharisee  is  the  whole 
point  of  the  teaching  of  the  parable.  Yet  the  fact 
of  justification  is  expressed  by  a  participle  only,  while 
the  verbal  predicate  is  that  he  went  down  to  his 
house,  a  fact  of  trifling  importance  in  comparison 
with  the  other.  Every  one  would  be  ready  to  allow 
that  the  sense  of  the  passage  would  be  lost,  if  the 
participial  clause  were  allowed  in  translation  to  precede 
the    statement    contained    in     the    verbal    predicate. 


LOCALITY  OF  CHURCHES   OF  GALATIA.      45 

Being  justified  in  comparison  luith  the  other  he  toent 
doiun  to  his  house,  certainly  does  not  convey  the  same 
meaning  as  do  the  words  He  went  cloiun  to  his  house 
justified  rather'  than  the  other.  This  latter  rendering 
treats  the  participial  clause  as  part  of  the  predicate 
but  not  so  the  other.  If  we  put  the  participle  first 
in  translating  we  lay  stress  on  the  unimportant  fact 
of  the  publican's  return  to  his  house,  whereas  if  we 
keep  the  order  and  say  he  luent  doiun  to  his  house 
justified,  we  emphasise  the  fact  of  justification  which 
no  one  can  refuse  to  allow  to  be  the  emphasis  intended 
in  the  parable.^ 

A  parallel  use  of  the  participle  is  to  be  found  in 
the  Septuagint  rendering  of  2  Kings  v.  27,  where 
we  read  :  km  e^rjXOev  e/c  irpoa-ooirov  avrov  XeXeTTjOajyueVo? 
wa-ei  ^f(oi/.  Here  the  finite  verb  and  participle  to- 
gether form  one  predicate,  and  the  participial  clause 
is  of  as  much  (if  not  of  greater)  importance  to  the 
predication  as  is  e^rjXOev  ck  irpoa-wirov  avrov. 

We  may  compare  also  the  words  aTrrjXOev  Xvirovjuievog 
in  St.  Matt.  xix.  22  and  St.  Mark  x.  22.  In  this 
case  both  words  airrjXQev  and  XviroviJLevo<i  are  essential 
to  the  predication.  Invert  the  order  and  translate 
Being  sorrowful  he  ivent  away,  and  the  meaning  is 
lost  or  at  any  rate  rendered  ambiguous. 

Similar  instances,  though  not  exactly  parallel,  are 
St.  John  ix.  7,  ijXOev  jSXeirwv,  and  2   Kings  xviii.   37 

•^  The  use  of  TreLpa^o/xevos  (referred  to  above)  in  St.  Luke  iv.  1  is 
singularly  parallel  with  that  of  dediKaLWfMtPos  here.  I  only  refrained 
from  coupling  this  instance  with  the  two  now  given  because  the 
verbal  predicate  in  iv.  i.  (ijyeTo)  is  passive.  I  do  not  myself  think 
there  is  any  real  difference  of  principle,  but  I  sought  for  passages 
with  an  active  verb  coupled  with  a  passive  participle. 


46  THE  EPISTLE    TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

(LXX)  Kai  eicfjXOep  EXza/cJ/x  uto?  XeX/cfoi'  o  oikovojuo^ 
/c.T.X.  Sieppt]-)(^6Teg  to.  L^dria.  I  say  these  are  not 
exactly  parallel  instances  because  the  participle  is 
an  active  one,  but  certainly  in  the  case  of  a  verb 
used  intransitively,  such  as  pXeirwv,  there  is  no  essential 
difference  between  active  and  passive.  It  is  the  new 
condition  of  the  once  blind  man  who  now  sees  to 
which  attention  is  drawn,  not  any  particular  action 
on  his  part.  He  came  with  his  sight  restored  is  the 
sense.  His  sight  was  already  restored  when  he  re- 
turned.^ 

Our  attempts  to  interpret  the  KcoXvOevreg  clause 
causally  and  retrospectively  having  failed,  and  sufficient 
reasons  having  now  been  given  for  thinking  that 
the  participle  may  be  here  predicatively  used,  it  will 
be  well  so  to  understand  the  sentence.  And  they 
went  thro2igh  the  Phrygo-Galatian  region  forbidden  hy 
the  Holy   Ghost  to  speak  the  word  in  Asia. 

Now  it  must  be  noticed  that  the  passive  participle 
KwXvOevre^  directs  no  attention  to  the  act  of  prohibition 
on  the  part  of  the  Holy  Ghost,  but  to  the  state  of 
the  travellers  in  regard  to  its  imposition.  Further, 
the  whole  sentence,  SirjXOov  tvjv  ^pvy'iav  kul  TaXariKriv 
"^wpav  KcoXvOei'Te^  viro  tov  aylov  irvf.viJ.aTO<i  XaXfjcraL 
Tov  \6yov  ev  rij  'Acria,  gives  no  clue  as  to  when  the 
prohibition  was  given,  whether  before  the  passage 
through  the  Phrygo-Galatian  region  or  during  the 
passage,  or  at  its  close.      The  one  thing  made  clear 

^  So  also  the  participial  clause  diepp-^xores  ra  ifiaTia  placed  after  the 
verbal  predicate  directs  attention  to  the  (^tafe  rather  than  to  the 
action  of  those  spoken  of.  The  Hebrew  is  nn:3  ^p^np,  the  participle 
being  passive. 


LOCALITY  OF  CHURCHES   OF  GALATIA.      47 

is  that  when  they  were  at  the  end  of  that  region 
they  knew  they  were  not  to  preach  the  word  in  Asia. 
How  long  they  had  known  this  is  not  told  us.  Had 
St.  Luke  written  (^feX^oVre?  <^e  rnv  ^pvyiav  koi 
TaXaTiKrjv  ■ywpav  €Kw\ijOt](Tav  viro  tou  ayiov  7rpeu^aT0<; 
/c.T.A.  we  should  have  understood  that  the  participial 
clause  SieXOopreg  k.t.\.  marked  the  point  of  time 
when  the  prohibition  was  made.  And  the  finite  verb 
€Ka)XvO}]G-av  would  have  drawn  attention  to  the  fact 
of  prohibition  at  a  definite  time.  As  we  understand 
the  sentence,  the  emphasis  is  on  the  fact  that  there 
was  a  prohibition  imposed  on  the  travellers  and  not 
at  all  on  the  fact  that  they  went  through  the  Phrygo- 
Galatian  region,  which  fact,  according  to  our  interpre- 
tation, only  points  to  the  time  or  place  ivhere  the 
prohibition  would  take  effect,  not  where  it  was  given. 

Further,  this  interpretation  of  the  sentence  in 
question  both  preserves  the  character  of  the  whole 
paragraph  as  intended  to  take  us  on  step  by  step 
to  Troas  en  route  for  Macedonia,  and  it  has  this  great 
advantage  over  the  other  rendering  whereby  the 
participial  clause  is  made  retrospective  and  causal,  that 
it  makes  a  distinction  between  the  two  prohibitions 
imposed  on  the  travellers,  which  distinction  seems 
to  be  intended  in  the  original.  For  of  Asia  it  is 
said  they  might  not  speak  the  vjord  there,  but  Bithynia 
they  might  not  even  cnicr. 

We  therefore  understand  the  passage  thus : 

And  they  went  through  the  Phrygo-Galatian  region 

forbidden   by  the  Holy  Ghost  to  speak  the  word  in 

Asia  ;   and  when  they  came  over  against  Mysia  they 

were   assaying    to   go    into    Bithynia   and   the    Spirit 


48  THE  EPISTLE    TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

of  Jesus   suffered  them  not ;    and  passing   by  Mysia 
they  came  down  to  Troas. 


Our  inquiry  must  now  be  directed  to  the  bearing 
of  the  rendering,  to  which  we  have  been  led,  on  the 
rival  theories  respecting  the  locality  of  the  churches 
of  Galatia. 

The  North  Galatian  theory  has  it  in  its  favour 
that  the  connection  of  the  finite  verb  SirjXOov  and 
its  sentence  with  what  has  gone  before  might  suggest 
that  the  Phry go- Galatian  region  is  here  new  ground 
to  St.  Paul.  The  Se  of  verse  6  answers  to  the  /mev  ovv 
of  verse  5.  In  the  earlier  verse  is  summarised  the 
result  of  the  Apostle's  re-visit  to  the  churches  founded 
during  his  first  journey,  and  then  the  historian  passes 
on  to  tell  of  progress  through  lands  not  until  now 
visited  by  St.  Paul.  But  there  are  serious  difficulties 
to  this  interpretation  of  verse  6.  In  the  first  place, 
it  is  recognised  by  those  who  favour  the  North 
Galatian  theory  that  the  route  into  Galatia  proper 
was  an  unlikely  one  in  itself  and  one  that  would 
only  be  taken  for  some  special  reason.  St.  Luke 
does  not,  according  to  our  understanding  of  his 
language,  give  any  reason  for  this  route  being  chosen, 
and  no  reason  can  be  given  except  that  it  was  through 
illness  that  St.  Paul  went  to  Galatia.  But  in  regard 
to  this  point  there  are  the  same  difficulties  that  we 
encountered  when  we  read  ^teXOoWe?.  We  can  under- 
stand that  illness  might  detain  the  Apostle  in  Galatia 
if  once  he  had  gone  there  for  other  reasons ;  but  that 
it  should  take  him  there,  we  find  it  difficult  to  believe. 


LOCALITY  OF  CHURCHES   OF  G ALALIA.     49 

Then  again,  how  are  we  to  explain  the  summary 
way  in  which  this  visit  to  Galatia  is  recorded  ?  If 
St.  Paul  visited  the  principal  cities  and  founded 
churches  in  them,  how  is  it  that  not  a  single  city 
of  North  Galatia  is  mentioned  by  name?  It  is  St. 
Luke's  habit  when  he  is  narrating  the  Apostle's 
travels  over  new  ground  to  mention  the  names  of 
the  cities  and  to  record  what  happened  in  them.  But 
when  he  goes  over  the  ground  again,  unless  for  some 
particular  purpose  he  wishes  to  detain  his  readers 
at  some  city  to  tell  of  something  specially  important 
(as  for  example  in  the  case  of  Timothy  at  Lystra), 
he  sums  up  the  district  as  briefly  as  he  can.^  It  is 
certainly  ditficult  to  account  for  silence  as  to  events 
in  the  cities  of  North  Galatia,  and  still  more  difficult 
to  say  why  there  is  no  mention  of  the  cities  by  name, 
if  St.  Paul  did,  as  those  who  hold  the  North  Galatian 
theory  contend,  visit  the  country  on  his  second  journey. 

It  may  be  answered  that  St.  Luke  is  hastening  on 
to  Troas  and  so  to  Macedonia.  But  if,  in  his  zeal 
to  take  his  readers  across  the  Aegean,  he  forgets  or 
neglects  to  record  in  any  detail  the  founding  of  the 
important  churches  of  Galatia,  we  cannot  reconcile 
this  with  his   usual  practice. 

Moreover,  no  emphasis  is  laid  on  the  actual  journey 
through  the  Phrygo-Galatian  region.  Apart  from  the 
fact  that  we  have  here  an  aorist  (SiijXOoi^)  and  not 
an  imperfect  (as  in  xv.  3  and  41)  whereby  the 
progress  of  a  missionary  journey  through  new  country 
would   be  more  naturally  expressed,  we  have  already 

1 A  good  instance  is  Acts  xviii.  23,  which  will  be  considered  in 
the  next  chapter. 

D 


50  THE  EPISTLE    TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

given  reasons  for  thinking  that  the  real  emphasis 
of  the  sentence  is  on  the  participial  clause  which 
we  have  decided  to  interpret  predicatively.  The 
passage  through  the  Phrygo-Galatian  region  marks 
only  the  poiut  at  which  the  prohibition  imposed  by 
the  Holy  Ghost  against  speaking  the  word  in  Asia 
applies.  This  particular  region  was  not  the  prohibited 
region  but  the  one  preceding  it.  In  fact  Professor 
Eamsay's  explanation  of  t^v  ^pvylav  koi  TaXariKrji/ 
^wpav,  which  defines  it  to  be  the  Phrygian  part  of 
the  province  of  Galatia,  suits  the  context  admirably. 
After  summing  up  the  work  of  the  Apostle  on  the 
old  ground  in  the  words  :  at  juei^  ovv  cKKXtja-laL  ecrrepe- 
ovvTO  T>;  TTLCTTeL  Kui  e7repi(Tcr€vov  T(p  aptOfjicp  kuO'  rj/mepai', 
the  historian  is  going  on  to  tell  of  work  on  new 
ground;  and  that  new  ground  is  not  Asia  nor  Bithynia, 
but  Macedonia  ;  and  why  it  was  Macedonia  is  made 
clear  in  the  paragraph  xvi.  6-10. 

It  may  be  objected  that  St.  Luke  did  not  call  the 
X'^P'^  about  Antioch  (xiii.  49)  Phyrgo-Galatian  before, 
nor  even  hint  that  it  belonged  to  Galatia.  But  the 
answer  to  this  is  that  according  to  our  interpretation 
of  the  KwXvOevreg  clause,  there  is  more  emphasis  on 
the  prohibition  against  speaking  the  word  in  Asia 
than  there  is  on  the  passing  through  the  Phrygo- 
Galatian  region.  We  may  therefore  expect  that  the 
choice  of  the  epithet  Phrygo-Galatian  will  have  some 
connection  with  this  prohibition,  and  such  we  contend 
it  has.  Had  the  historian  called  the  X^P^  ^^^® 
Phrygian  region,  or  Phrygia,  his  meaning  would  have 
been  lost  because  Phrygia  was  partly  in  Asia.  The 
epithet    as    we    have    it    exactly    describes    a    x^/>« 


LOCALITY  OF  CHURCHES   OF  GALATIA.      51 

which  stopped  short  at  the  boundaries  of  Asia  where 
speaking  the  word  was  forbidden. 


The  conchision  to  which  we  have  come  then  is 
this,  that  whether  we  take  ^leX^ovre^  or  SitjXOou  as 
the  true  readino-  in  xvi.  6,  ToXariKo^  is  used  in  a 
political  sense  in  the  phrase  ttjv  ^pvylav  kui  TaXaTiKiju 
■)(oopav.  This  gives  consistency  to  the  wdiole  passage, 
which  then  explains  naturally  how  it  was  that  step 
by  step  the  Apostle  was  led  to  labour  in  Macedonia 
after  passing  over  districts  where  he  would,  but  for 
the  Divine  intervention,  have  more  naturally  gone. 
The  whole  paragraph  xvi.  6-10  is  a  record  of  Divine 
guidance.     We  venture  to  understand  it  thus : 

Either  while  they  were  passing  through  the  Phrygo- 
Galatian  region,  or  after  they  had  got  through  it,  they 
were  forbidden  by  the  Holy  Ghost  to  preach  the  word 
in  Asia ;  that  is  to  say,  that  by  the  time  they  got  to 
the  boundary  of  the  province  of  Asia  they  understood 
they  were  not  to  preach  in  that  province,  so  they 
did  not  preach  there  but  struck  north  intending  to 
go  to  Bithynia ;  but  at  a  point  of  their  journey 
opposite  Mysia  they  were  made  to  understand  that 
they  were  not  to  enter  Bithynia,  so  they  turned 
westwards,  passing  by  Mysia,  and  not  preaching  in 
it  (for  as  Mysia  was  in  Asia  it  was  prohibited  ground 
for  preaching),  and  so  they  came  to  Troas  on  the  coast, 
where  a  vision  made  it  clear  that  God  had  called 
them  to  cross  to  Macedonia  to  preach  the  Gospel 
there. 

In    Macedonia    the    missionary   work   begins    again, 


52  THE  EPISTLE   TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

and    is    recorded     by    St.    Luke    in    his    accustomed 
detail. 

It  is  worth  while  to  notice  that  our  interpretation 
of  this  paragraph  gives  to  Kara  rrjv  MvcrLav  its  full 
meaning.  For  taking  the  words  to  mean  ove7'  against 
Mysia,  we  understand  that  Mysia  lay  at  right-angles 
to  the  direction  of  the  course  they  were  pursuing. 
Such  would  be  the  case  if  the  travellers  were  journeying 
due  north  towards  Bithynia.  One  province  being 
forbidden  them  for  preaching,  they  were  intending 
to  go  into  another.  To  this  they  directed  their  steps 
but,  when  they  were  over  against  Mysia,  a  further 
prohibition  was  imposed.  The  missionary  band  is 
forbidden  to  enter  Bithynia ;  so  they  turn  at  right 
angles  to  their  previous  route,  and,  still  travelling 
through  a  part  of  the  province  of  Asia,  viz.  Mysia,  in 
which,  however,  they  did  not  preach  (such  seems  to  be 
the  force  of  TrapeXOopre^),  they  came  to  the  sea  coast 
at  Troas,  where  fresh  guidance  was  granted  to  them. 

It  seems  to  the  present  writer  that  a  fatal  objection 
to  Dean  Farrar's  interpretation  of  Asia  as  Lydia 
and  not  the  whole  of  the  lioman  province  of  that 
name,  lies  in  this :  that  such  interpretation  fails  to 
account  for  the  conduct  of  the  travellers  in  regard 
to  Mysia.  That  the  travellers  "  passed  by "  Mysia 
cannot  mean  of  course  that  they  did  not  enter  Mysia 
at  all,  for  they  came  to  Troas  which  was  itself  in 
Mysia.  And  this  is  acknowledged  most  unmistakably 
by    Dean    Farrar.-^      Making    TrapeXOovre^   equivalent 

^  Life  and  Work  of  St.  Paul,  vol.  i.,  p.  476,  footnote. 


LOCALITY  OF  CHURCHES  OF  G ALALIA.      53 

to  a(p€VTe?  ("  neglecting ")  he  says  this  "  cannot  be 
translated  'passing  through/  which  would  be  SieXOovre^, 
though  a  glance  at  the  map  will  show  that  they  must 
have  passed  through  My  si  a  without  stopping."  But 
Dean  Farrar  gives  no  other  reason  for  this  neglect 
of  Mysia  except  that  "in  its  bleak  and  tliinly  populated 
uplands  it  offered  but  few  opportunities  for  evangelisa- 
tion." Of  course  if  the  Dean  is  sure  for  other  reasons 
that  Asia  means  Lydia,  and  so  the  prohibition  imposed 
by  the  Holy  Ghost  against  speaking  the  word  in  Asia 
did  not  hold  good  in  Mysia,  some  such  attempt  as 
he  has  made  to  explain  the  "  neglect "  of  Mysia  may 
be  called  for.  But  is  it  not  more  natural  to  find 
the  reason  for  the  "  neglect "  in  the  context ;  which 
we  at  once  do  if  Asia  be  the  province  of  that  name  ? 

Enough  has  now  been  said  to  show  that  the  inter- 
pretation of  the  KoAvOevre^  clause 'for  which  we  have 
been  contending  makes  the  paragraph  xvi.  6-10 
perfectly  consistent  with  itself  and  explanatory  of 
itself.  This  is  surely  a  great  gain.  But  it  becomes 
necessary  now  to  examine  whether  the  conclusions 
to  which  we  have  thus  far  come  are  consistent  with 
the  use  of  TaXariKog  in  Acts  xviii.  23.  This  inquiry 
will  form  the  subject  of  the  next  chapter. 


CHAPTEK    IV. 
THE   USE   OF  TaXarcKos   IN   ACTS   XVIII.    23. 

Kaf  KureXOcov  eiV  Kaicrapiav,  avafiag  koi  aariraad- 
fi€V09  Tt]v  €KK\}]G-iav,  KUTe^t]  ek  'AvTLoyeiav  KOI  7roi}'/cra<? 
"^povov  TLva  e^rjXOev,  8iepy6iJievo<i  /ca^e^jy?  rr]V  VaXaTLKrjv 
yypav  Kai  ^pvyiap,  crTtjpL^cov  iraprag  rovg  /uLaOrjrdg. 

In  the  two  preceding  chapters  of  this  essay  we 
have  concluded  that  Acts  xvi.  6  does  not  seem  to 
record  a  visit  of  St.  Paul  to  Galatia  proper  on  his 
second  missionary  journey.  In  our  examination  of 
that  verse  and  of  the  passage  in  which  it  occurs  we 
have  purposely  abstained  from  any  reference  to  the 
meaning  of  TaXariKog  in  the  passage  now  before  us. 
We  have,  it  is  true,-^  quoted  xviii.  22,  23  already,  but 
the  use  we  made  of  it  was  quite  independent  of  any 
special  interpretation  of  rtjv  Ta\aTiKt)u  x^P^^  '^"^ 
^pvylav.  For  of  course  it  is  allowed  by  the  North 
and  South  Galatian  schools  alike  that  old  ground 
is  covered  in  verse  23,  though  a  difference  of  opinion 
necessarily  must  exist  as  to  what  the  old  ground 
was.      According    to    the    South    Galatian    theory   the 

iSee  p.   16. 


LOCALITY  OF  CHURCHES   OF  G ALALIA.     55 

country  here  summed  up  in  t^v  TaXariKyv  Xiji^pav  kul 
^pvylav  was  first  visited  on  the  first  missionary 
journey  of  St.  Paul,  whereas  according  to  the  advocates 
of  the  opposite  theory  it  was  on  his  second  journey  that 
the  Apostle  first  visited  it. 

AVhat  we  have  now  to  do  is  to  examine  whether 
xviii.  23  can  be  interpreted  consistently  with  the 
interpretation  we  have  given  to  xvi.  6,  or  whether 
there  is  anything  in  the  form  of  the  expression  rr]v 
VoKaTLKrjv  x^pav  koI  ^pvylav,  which  should  lead  us  to 
think  that  we  were  wrong  in  our  previous  conclusions. 
To  this  inquiry  we  at  once  proceed. 

And  first  it  will  be  well  to  state  that  it  is  not 
necessary  that  the  Galatian  region  of  xviii.  23  should 
be  the  same  as  "  the  Phrygo-Galatian  region  "  of  xvi. 
6.  For  we  must  be  careful  to  notice  the  position 
of  Km  ^pvylav  in  the  verse  now  before  us.  In  xvi.  6 
there  can  be  no  doubt  that  ^pvylav  is  used  adjectiv- 
ally, but  it  is  by  no  means  clear  that  in  the  later 
passage  the  word  is  so  used.  Indeed  the  difterence 
between  the  two  expressions,  rriv  ^pvylav  km  TaXariKrjv 
ywpav  and  Trjv  TaXariKyji/  yo^pav  kui  ^pvyiav,  is  so 
remarkable  that  any  interpretation  of  them  which 
does  not  take  this  into  account,  or  which  fails  to  give 
it  its  proper  value,  would  be  wrong. 

We  may  then  lay  this  down :  that  if  the  South 
Galatian  theory  is  able  to  give  a  better  explanation 
of  the  difference  of  expression  in  the  two  verses  than 
is  afforded  by  the  North  Galatian  theory,  then  the 
likelihood  of  its  correctness  is  increased.  If,  again, 
the  explanations  given  by  supporters  of  the  rival 
theories  are  evenly  balanced  in  value,  we  stand  where 


56  THE  EPISTLE   TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

we  were  at  the  end  of  the  previous  chapter,  and  this 
verse  really  adds  nothing  to  the  argument.  But  if  the 
advocates  of  the  North  Galatian  theory  can  give  the 
better  account  of  the  difference  of  expression  in  xvi.  6 
and  xviii.  23,  then  (we  readily  acknowledge  it)  our 
position  reached  after  the  examination  of  xvi.  6  is  not 
so  strong  as  it  was. 

The  real  point  of  difference  between  the  two  rival 
theories  in  their  explanations  of  the  difference  of  ex- 
pression in  T^v  ^pvylav  Kal  Va\aTLKt]v  x^pav  and 
T)]v  TaXariKrjv  x<Mpav  koi  ^puyiav  is  this.  The  South 
Galatian  school  interprets  the  X'^P^  ^^  ^^^  ^^®  verse 
to  be  different  from  the  X'^P^  ^^  ^^^®  other,  whereas 
the  rival  school  makes  the  two  expressions  mean  the 
same  thing  but  accounts  for  their  difference  of  form  by 
saying  that  the  order  of  the  Apostle's  route  was  re- 
versed.^ Those  who  take  the  South  Galatian  view 
contend  that  Trju  ^puylav  koi  Ta\aTiKr]P  X^P^^  ^^ 
xvi.  6  is  included  in  t^v  TaXaTiKrjv  X'^P^^  '^^'  ^pvylav 
of  xviii.  23,  but  that  this  latter  expression  takes  in 
more  than  the  Phrygo-Galatian  region  of  xvi.  6.  In 
fact  each  school  can  interpret  xviii.  23  consistently 
with  the  theory  it  supports.  Before  setting  forth  the 
South  Galatian  interpretation  it  will  be  well  to  inquire 
whether  the  explanation  the  North  Galatian  school 
gives  of  xviii.  23  is  such  as  to  weaken  or  strengthen 
their  case. 

Let  it  be  allowed  that  the  North  Galatian  theory  is 


^  Blass  certainly  takes  this  view.  See  his  commentary  on  xviii. 
23.  It  is  not  quite  clear  whether  Lightfoot  does  so  or  not,  but  his 
pote  3  in  Galatiavs,  p.  22,  seems  to  mean  that  he  does, 


LOCALITY  OF  CHURCHES   OF  G ALALIA.      57 

correct,  that  St.  Paul  did  visit  North  Galatia  on  his 
second  missionary  journey.  This  being  so,  we  readily 
allow  that  he  visited  it  again  on  his  third  journey,  and 
we  interpret  t^v  Ta\aTiK})v  -^^wpav  kuI  ^pvylav  as 
equivalent  in  extension  to  Tt-jv  ^pvylav  kg.}  TaXariKrjv 
■^(jopav. 

iSTow  at  once  this  question  forces  itself  upon  us : 
How  are  we  to  account  for  the  external  position  of 
^pvylav  ?  Why  is  the  expression  employed  in  xviii. 
23    not   Tr}v  Ta\aTiKi)v   koI   ^pvyiav   -^wpavl 

To  the  present  writer  it  seems  that  ^pvylav  in  xviii. 
23  must  be  taken  to  be  a  noun,  whether  the  North  or 
South  Galatian  theory  be  adopted.  Grammar  seems 
to  require  it ;  and  in  any  case,  if  it  be  an  adjective,  on 
no  account  will  grammar  permit  of  its  being  under- 
stood as  a  part  of  the  epithet  VaXariK^^v,  so  as  to  have 
a  compound  epithet  as  in  xvi.  6.  So  then  there 
can  be  no  doubt  as  to  the  translation  of  Tr]v  TaXarLKrip 
■^(jopav  Koi  ^pvyiav.  We  must  render  "  the  Galatian 
region  and  Phrygia."  If  ^pvylav  were  taken  as  an 
adjective  we  should  have  to  translate  "  the  Galatian 
region  and  a  Phrygian  one " ;  and  this  would  not 
be  satisfactory  to  either  side.  If  any  would  make 
a  compound  adjective  and  interpret  rrjv  TaXariKrjv 
XO)pav  Kou  ^pvylav  as  equivalent  to  Tt]v  TaXaTiKrjv  Km 
^pvylav  x^p^^y  ^V6  can  only  reply  with  a  non  possumus. 

Well,  then,  St.  Paul  on  his  third  journey  goes  through 
the  Phrygo- Galatian  region  of  xvi.  6  in  the  reverse 
order.  Why  then  does  the  writer  not  say  ttjv  TaXarlav 
KOI  ^pvylav  ?  It  may  be  said  that  he  called  it  a  x^P^ 
in  xvi.  6  therefore  he  must  do  so  now.  Yes,  but  there 
it  was  a  compound  X'^P^ — ^  Phrygo-Galatian  region. 


58  THE  EPISTLE    TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

Tr\v  TaXartKrjv  x^P«^j  if  it  means  t>V  TaXarlav,  seems 
to  be  circumlocution. 

And  here  too  we  must  come  back  to  the  alternative 
interpretations  of  "  the  Phrygo-Galatian  region "  of 
xvi.  6  given  by  Lightfoot.^  If  we  understand  that 
this  region  means  Galatia  proper,  once  a  part  of 
Phrygia,  the  argument  as  to  the  order  of  TaXariK^v 
and  ^pvylav  in  the  two  passages  becomes  meaningless. 
And  further,  the  mention  of  ^pvyiav  in  xviii.  23  is 
wholly  unintelligible,  for  if  some  part  of  what  was  then 
Phrygia  is  not  included  in  the  phrase  Trjv  ^pvylav  kol 
TaXariKrjp  x^P^^y  then  Phrygia  cannot  be  old  ground 
on  the  third  missionary  journey,  and  surely  no  one 
will  question  that  the  narrative  implies  that  it  is 
old  ground.  There  really  is  no  place  for  Lightfoot's 
explanation  of  "the  Phrygo-Galatian  region"  as  Galatia 
proper,  once  Phrygia,  when  we  come  to  this  new 
expression  of  xviii.  23,  unless  we  are  going  to  do 
violence  to  the  grammar  and  render  Kal  ^puylav  as 
equal  to  "  and  this  region  was  once  Phrygian,"  which 
surely  no  one  is  prepared  to  do.  We  were  obliged  in 
chapter  ii.  of  this  essay  to  admit  both  of  Lightfoot's 
alternative  interpretations  of  t»V  ^pvylav  koi  TaXariKrjv 
Xf^poiv  as  possible  because  we  preferred  not  to  compli- 
cate the  argument  by  an  appeal  to  xviii.  23  ;  but  now 
we  say  unhesitatingly  that  for  the  reasons  just  given 
we  think  it  a  wholly  untenable  interpretation  that  the 
epithet  should  mean  "  Galatian  once  Phrygian "  even 
on  the  hypothesis  of  the  truth  of  the  North  Galatian 
theory. 

Lightfoot's  other  interpretation   of  rriv  ^pvylav  koi 

1  Galatians,  p.  22.     See  chapter  ii.  of  this  essay. 


LOCALITY  OF  CHURCHES   OF  GALATIA.     59 

VaXaTLKhv  x<^paj/  is  not  open  to  the  same  objection,  for 
it  includes  some  part  of  what  was  still  Phrygia  in  the 
X^/oa.  We  have  in  chapter  ii.  objected  on  a  priori 
grounds  to  a  x^P^  being  called  Phrygo-Galatian 
because  ^:><X7'^  was  Phrygian  and  part  Galatian.  P)Ut 
waiving  that  objection  as  one  that  may  be  insufficient, 
we  must  examine  xviii.  23  in  the  light  of  the  only 
explanation  of  ti-jv  ^pvylav  koi  Ta\aTiKr]v  -x^pav  left  to 
those  who  take  Lightfoot's  view. 

To  the  present  writer  the  phrase  t^v  TaXaTiK}]v 
X<^pGLv  is  a  serious  stumbling-block  in  the  acceptance 
of  the  Xorth  Galatian  theory.  Granting  that  such  a 
phrase  as  rrjv  ^pvyiav  koli  VoXanKiiv  x^pav  might  be 
a  convenient  one  for  summarising  a  district  partly 
Phrygian  and  partly  Galatian  and  so  might  explain 
the  absence  of  t^v  TaXarlav,  he  yet  feels  that  the 
Tr]v  TaXaTiKrjv  x^P«i^  of  xviii.  23  is  wholly  unlikely  on 
the  North  Galatian  theory  as  being  circumlocution. 
The  only  way  to  get  over  the  difficulty  would  be  to 
take  Trjv  Ta\aTiK}]v  x^P^^  '^^^  ^pvylav  as  equivalent  to 
T>V  Va\aTLK}]v  Kai  ^pvylav  xoopav,  which  of  course  we 
refuse  to  do. 

The  conclusion  to  which  we  have  come  thus  far  in 
this  chapter  is  that  granting  a  North  Galatian  visit 
in  xvi.  6,  and  interpreting  xviii.  23  so  as  to  accord 
with  such  a  visit,  we  have  not  an  adequate  explanation 
of  the  phrase  r/V  TaXaTiKrjv  x^P^^  '^^'-  ^p^y'«^- 
Further,  the  explanation  that  is  given  of  the  variation 
of  this  phrase  from  that  used  in  xvi.  G  is  such  as  to 
cut  the  ground  from  under  the  possible  interpretation 
of  "  the  Phrygo-Galatian  region  "  suggested  by  Light- 


60  THE  EPISTLE    TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

foot,  that  the   region  is  to  be   understood  as   Galatia 
proper,  once  Phrygia. 

It  remains  now  to  interpret  xviii.  2  3  according  to  the 
other  theory,  and  to  determine  whether  the  phrase  t^v 
VaXaTiK^v  ywpav  koll  ^pvyiav  is  capable  of  justification. 

As  has  been  already  said,  the  South  Galatian  inter- 
pretation of  rrjv  TaXariKrjv  x(£)pav  understands  it  to  be 
a  different  x^P^  from  that  called  Triv  ^pvyiav  koi 
TaXariKriv  x^jpai/  in  xvi.  6.  Nor  is  there  any  reason 
why  the  two  should  not  be  different  seeing  that  the 
epithet  is  different  in  the  two  cases.  One  thing  only 
have  we  a  right  to  expect  and  that  is,  that  raXar/zco? 
should  be  used  in  the  same  sense  each  time.  If  it  is 
employed  politically  in  xvi.  6  we  should  reasonably 
conclude  that  it  is  so  used  in  the  later  passage.  This 
consistency  is  assured  by  the  South  Galatian  inter- 
pretation. In  saying  this  we  do  not  suggest  that  a 
like  consistency  does  not  obtain  in  the  opposite  school, 
which  interprets  Va\aTiK6<s  ethnologically  each  time 
it  occurs.  Neither  side  has  any  advantage  then  in 
this  regard. 

The  Roman  province  of  Galatia  was  at  this  time 
very  extensive,  so  that  there  is  nothing  improbable  in 
the  South  Galatian  position  in  interpreting  the  x^P« 
of  xviii.  23  as  different  from  that  of  xvi.  6,  seeing  that 
the  latter  is  described  by  a  twofold  epithet  while  the 
other  is  simply  Galatian. 

There  is  not  the  least  doubt  that  xviii.  23  is  meant 
to  take  us  over  old  ground,  so  that  t^v  TaXariKtjv 
Xwpav  must  be  some  x^P«  with  which  we  are  already 
familiar,  though  we  may  not  know  it  by  this  name, 


LOCALITY  OF  CHURCHES   OF  GALATIA.      61 

Again  rrjv  TaXariKt^i/  x^P^^  '^^tl  ^pvylav  would  seem 
to  be  intended  to  take  us  over  all  the  old  ground 
until  new  ground  is  reached  in  xix.  1,  viz.  ra 
avwrepiKu.  p.ep}],  through  which  St.  Paul  passed  to 
Ephesus,  which  was  the  city  of  the  third  missionary 
journey — for  the  Apostle  had  hardly  visited  it  on 
the  former  journey  (xviii.  19).  That  all  the  ground 
is  intended  to  be  covered  would  seem  clear  from  the 
two  words  TrdpTag  and  Kadepi^.  We  expect  then 
that  this  phrase  Trjv  TaXariKrji/  ^wpav  kcu  ^pvylav  will 
include  certainly  all  the  churches  from  Derbe  to 
Antioch. 

It  would  be  difficult  otherwise  to  account  for  the 
omission  of  churches  so  important  as  those  of  Derbe 
and  Lystra  on  this  journey  westwards.  It  is  true 
indeed  that  at  the  beginning  of  the  Apostle's  second 
missionary  journey  we  have  mention  of  Syria  and 
Cilicia  and  of  St.  Paul  €7ri(TT}]pL^(jov  tu9  e/c/cX/^cr/a?, 
whereas  there  is  no  mention  of  Syria  and  Cilicia  or 
of  their  churches  now  that  he  starts  on  his  third 
journey.  It  cannot  of  course  be  said  that  Syria  and 
Cilicia  are  included  in  t)]i^  TaXariK^jp  xuopav.  So  if 
churches  visited  on  the  second  journey  are  now  omitted, 
why  should  not  Derbe  and  Lystra  also  be  left  out  ? 
But  it  must  be  remembered  that  the  churches  of 
Derbe  and  Lystra  were  of  St.  Paul's  own  founding 
and  that  their  members  were  specially  his  disciples. 
It  is  not  impossible  that  the  attention  to  Syria 
and  Cilicia  on  tlie  second  journey  arose  from  the 
desirableness  of  delivering  to  the  churches  the  decrees 
of  the  Jerusalem  Council.  This  might  account  for 
mention  beins  made  of  these  churches  in  connection 


62  THE  EPISTLE   TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

with  the  second  journey,  while  there  is  no  mention 
of  them  in  the  third.  But  that  the  Apostle  should 
omit  to  visit  his  disciples  at  Lystra  and  Derbe  because 
he  had  already  visited  them  once  since  their  conversion 
to  the  faith,  we  find  it  difficult  to  believe,  and  the 
more  so  as  his  natural  route  to  Ephesus  lay  that  way. 
Seeing  then  that  Lystra  and  IJerbe  were  in  the 
province  of  Galatia  we  fail  to  see  why  they  should 
not  be  comprehended   in   t}]v  VaKaTiK)]v  yuipav. 

But  we  must  take  account  of  the  objection  that, 
in  the  narrative  of  the  first  missionary  journey,  Lystra 
and  Derbe  are  called  cities  of  Lycaonia.  {KaTe(pvyov 
eig  Tag  iroXeig  rijg  AvKaovla?  Kvarrpav  koll  Aep/Btjv  Kai 
Trjv  7repLX<j^pov,  Acts  xiv.  6.)  It  may  be  urged  that 
St.  Luke  would  have  said  in  Acts  xviii.  23  Tr}v 
AvKaouiau  Kai  ^pvylav  and  not  have  introduced  the 
epithet  Va\aTLK6<i  to  apply  it  to  a  district  he  had 
not  so  described  before.  Professor  Eamsay  has  given 
a  sufficient  answer  to  this  objection.-^  Lycaonia  was 
not  wholly  in  the  province  of  Galatia,  but  the  part 
of  it  containing  Lystra  and  Derbe  did  belong  to  the 
great  province.  Professor  Ptamsay  lays  stress  on 
the  need  for  some  distinctive  name  in  Acts  xiv.  6 
so  as  to  indicate  that  from  Iconium  the  Apostle  passed 
to  another  x^pa  where  he  would  be  free  from  the 
molestation  he  had  suff'ered  at  Antioch  and  Iconium. 
He  was  already  in  the  Galatian  province  in  these 
two  cities,  so  that  some  name  whereby  the  two  parts 
of  the  province  could  be  distinguished  was  a  necessity 
for  the  understanding  of  the  narrative.  It  was  not 
"  into  Lycaonia "  that  the  persecuted  travellers   went 

^St.  Paul  the  Traveller,  pp.  110-112. 


LOCALITY  OF  CHURCHES   OF  G ALALIA.     63 

bufc  "  to  the  cities  of  Lycaonia,  Lystra  and  Derbe,  and 
the  region  round  about." 

While  then  Lystra  and  Derbe  were  called  cities  of 
Lycaonia  to  distinguish  them  from  Antioch  and  Iconium 
in  the  narrative  of  the  first  missionary  journey,  no  such 
distinction  is  required  in  this  setting  out  on  the  third 
journey. 

But  we  must  come  to  close  quarters  with  this 
phrase  t}]v  TaXariKtji/  ^oopav  kul  ^pvyiav.  Supposing 
that  this  is  meant  to  cover  the  old  ground  and  to 
include  Lystra,  Derbe,  Iconium  and  Antioch,  we  must 
still  inquire  which  part  of  the  phrase  is  applicable 
to  the  different  parts  of  the  route. 

Professor  Eamsay  understands  ti]v  Ta\aTiK)]v  x'^P^^ 
to  be  Lystra,  Derbe  kui  rijv  irepix^^pov.  Just  as  there 
was  a  Phrygo-Galatian  region,  so,  he  tells  us,  there 
was  a  Lycaono-Galatian  region.  Lycaonia  was  partly 
in  the  province  of  Galatia  and  partly  in  the  Eegnum 
Antiochi.  Trjv  TaXariKJjv  x^P^^  then  means  the 
Lycaono-Galatian  region,  this  being  the  first  Galatian 
region  the  Apostle  would  come  to  as  he  passed  from 
East  to  West.  And  Professor  Pamsay  argues  that  it 
would  seem  more  especially  Galatian,  rather  than 
Lycaonian,  to  one  coming  from  that  part  of  Lycaonia 
which  was  in  the  kingdom  of  Antiochus.  This  might 
explain  why  the  epithet  Lycaonian  is  not  applied 
here. 

Then  Professor  Pamsa}'  understands  ^pvyiav  to  be 
practically  the  same  as  Tr}v  ^pvylav  kui  TaXaTiK)}^ 
Xu)puv  of  xvi.  6,  the  lengthy  expression  not  being  used 
here  as  its  use  would  have  made  a  cumbersome  phrase, 


64  THE  EPISTLE    TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

of  meaning  no  clearer  than  that  of  the  phrase  actually 
employed. 

Exception  may  of  course  be  taken  by  supporters 
of  the  North  Galatian  theory  to  this  interpretation 
of  ^pvylav.  Had  the  same  region  been  called  Phrygia 
before  in  xvi.  6  the  objection  would  not  hold,  but 
the  phrase  rrjv  ^pvylav  Kal  VaXaTiKrjv  x.'^pav  was  made 
use  of  then  and  it  is  reasonable  to  ask  why  ^pvyiav 
is  sufficient  now.  But  it  must  be  remembered  that 
in  juxtaposition  with  the  SiyjXOou  rrju  ^pvylav  Km 
Ta\aTiK}]v  x^/>«^  of  xvi.  6  was  the  clause  KcoXvOevre^ 
VTTO  Tov  ayiov  TrveujuaTO^  XaXijcraL  tov  \oyop  ev  r/;  Kcrui, 
the  force  of  which  we  have  inquired  into  in  chapter 
iii.  of  this  essay.  The  mention  of  this  prohibition 
against  speaking  the  word  in  Asia  would  make  it 
practically  impossible  for  the  writer  to  put  Si^XOop  rriv 
^pvylap,  for  Phrygia  was  partly  in  the  province  of 
Asia.  There  is  special  point  in  the  epithet  TaXariKog 
being  used  in  connection  with  ^puyLog,  for,  surely, 
unless  our  reasoning  in  the  foregoing  chapter  be  quite 
wrong,  the  point  of  the  verse  is  that  the  application 
of  the  prohibition  to  speak  the  word  in  Asia  followed 
at  once  on  the  conclusion  of  their  passage  over  the 
old  ground.  It  was  in  the  Galatian  part  of  Phrygia 
that  they  were  allowed  to  preach  as  they  did  before, 
but  when  they  came  to  the  Asiatic  part  of  it  they 
were  prohibited. 

But  now  in  this  new  verse,  xviii.  23,  there  is  no 
such  prohibition.  Asia,  and  in  particular  Ephesus, 
is  the  Apostle's  destination ;  and  thus,  even  though 
a  part  of  Phrygia  was  in  Asia,  there  is  no  serious 
objection  to  the  use  of  ^pvyla  for  what  the  reader 


LOCALITY  OF  CHURCHES   OF  GALATIA.     65 

may  quite  well  understand  has  been  called  Tr]v  ^pvy'iav 
KUL  Ta\aTLKi]v  x<^pav  in  xvi.  6.  The  Apostle's  preaching 
does  not  now  stop  when  he  gets  out  of  Galatian  Phrygia. 
He  may  speak  the  word  in  Asiatic  Phrygia  too. 

This  expression  of  what  was  called  t;)i/  ^pvylav  kol 
TaXariKijv  x^P^^  ill  ^'vi.  6  by  the  simple  ^pvylav 
in  xviii.  23,  may  then  help  to  corroborate  the  interpre- 
tation of  the  Kco\vOevT€^  clause  which  we  laid  down 
in  the  preceding  chapter. 

To  the  writer  of  this  essay,  Professor  Eamsay's 
interpretation  of  ^pvylav  as  equivalent  to  rrjv  ^pvylav 
Koi.  TaXaTLKijv  x^P^^  seemed  at  first  the  least  satis- 
factory part  of  the  South  Galatian  theory.  But  a  closer 
examination  of  the  point  of  difficulty  has  tended 
rather  to  a  confirmation  of  the  theory  in  his  mind, 
and  he  thinks  that  what  has  weighed  with  him  may 
weigh  with  others  also.  To  him  it  seems  that  we 
must  either  explain  the  phrase  Trji>  TaXariKijp  x^^P^^ 
KOI  ^pvylav  as  we  have  just  done,  referring  n^v 
Ta\aTLK}]v  x'^P^^  to  Lycaono-Galatia  and  ^puylav  to 
Galatian  Phrygia,  or  else  x^P«  must  be  interpreted 
less  technically  and  more  generally  and  the  whole 
phrase  r^jv  ToXutlkjjp  x^P^^'  '^^'  ^pvylav  be  taken 
to  mean  the  Galatian  region  including  Phrygia,  i.e. 
its  Phrygian  part.  An  objection  to  this  rendering 
would  be  that  kul  ^pvylav  is  superfluous  if  rrjv 
Ta\aTiK)]v  x^P^^  already  takes  in  the  whole  of  the 
south  part  of  the  Galatian  province.  But,  though 
in  one  sense  it  is  superfluous,  in  another  it  is  not, 
for  it  helps  to  define  the  full  extent  of  the  journey 
before  the  new  part  is  reached. 

E 


66  THE  EPISTLE    TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

While  then  the  difficulty  of  an  exact  analysis 
of  the  phrase  t^v  Tu\utik>)p  x^P^^  '^"'  ^pvylav  must 
be  acknowledged,  there  is  good  reason  for  understanding 
VaXaTLKo^  in  a  provincial  sense.  While  the  North 
Galatian  school  are  able  to  fit  in  this  phrase  with 
their  theory,  the  doing  so  only  creates  further  diffi- 
culties for  them  to  solve ;  for  either  they  must  take 
^pvylav  adjectivally,  which  is  to  violate  the  grammar, 
or  else,  taking  it  as  a  noun,  they  have  to  explain 
the  circumlocution  involved  in  rrjv  Ta\aTiK))v  x.'^pav, 
for  which,  on  their  theory,  ti]v  TaXarlau  ought  to 
suffice. 

We  have  next  to  examine  the  contents  of  the 
Epistle  to  the  Galatians.  To  this  investigation  we 
proceed  in   the   next  chapter. 


CHAPTEE    V. 

AKGUMENTS   FOE  THE   DESTINATION  OF  THE 
EPISTLE   DERIVED   FEOM   ITS   CONTENTS. 

In  the  three  preceding  chapters  we  clami  to  have 
shown  that  the  two  passages  in  the  Acts  in  which  the 
epithet  TaXariKog  occurs  do  not  favour  the  North 
Galatian  theory.  In  examining  the  first  of  the  pass- 
ages we  admitted  into  our  criticism  of  it  the  statement 
made  by  St.  Paul  in  the  Epistle  to  the  Galatians  that 
it  was  on  account  of  an  infirmity  of  the  flesh  that  he 
preached  the  Gospel  to  them  to  irporepov.  It  was 
right  and  fair  to  make  use  of  this  statement,  because 
at  first  sight  it  seemed  that  there  might  be  some 
connection  between  the  detention  of  the  Apostle  on 
account  of  sickness,  and  that  which  is  described  by 
St.  Luke  as  a  hindrance  or  prohibition  imposed  by 
the  Holy  Spirit.  But  the  admission  of  this  hypothesis 
led  to  a  reductio  ad  absurdum  and  there  was  nothing; 
for  it  but  to  abandon  the  hypothesis  altogether. 

It  remains  now  to  examine  the  Epistle  to  the 
Galatians  more  generally  in  order  to  ascertain  whether 
its   contents  are   consonant  with   the   conclusion   that 


68  THE  EPISTLE    TO    THE  GALATIANS. 

has  been  reached  respecting  the  meaning  of  VaKariKoq 
in  Acts  xvi.  and  xviii.  If  that  conchision  be  correct 
then  St.  Paul  did  not  visit  North  Galatia  at  all,  and 
consequently  his  Epistle,  being  addressed  to  churches 
of  his  own  founding,  must  have  been  intended  for  the 
churches  of  South  Galatia,  the  churches  of  Lystra 
and  Derbe,  Iconium  and  Antioch. 

We  must  inquire  whether  there  is  anything  con- 
tained in  the  Epistle  to  mark  its  destination.  It 
has  been  thought  by  some  that  though  the  evidence  of 
the  Acts  in  favour  of  a  visit  to  North  Galatia  is 
somewhat  uncertain,  yet  the  point  can  be  decided 
in  favour  of  such  a  visit  by  an  appeal  to  the  Epistle. 
What  then  are  the  contents  of  the  Epistle  which  are 
supposed  to  favour  the  North  Galatian  theory  ? 

Eoremost  is  the  statement  of  iv.  13.  It  was 
thought  that  the  illness  of  the  Apostle  explained  quite 
naturally  why  he  should  have  gone  out  of  his  more 
natural  course,  and  have  passed  into  a  wild  and  semi- 
barbarous  region.  This  statement  of  the  Epistle  would, 
it  is  true,  help  to  explain  such  a  circuitous  course 
if  lue  had  otliQi'  evidence  that  such  a  course  ivas  taken. 

But  the  value  of  such  evidence  has  broken  down 
under  examination.  Those  who  hold  the  North  Gal- 
atian theory  must  show  in  detail  how  Gal.  iv.  13 
is  to  be  reconciled  with  Acts  xvi,  6,  and  not  fancy 
that  the  statement  of  the  Epistle  is  in  agreement  with 
that  of  the  Acts,  just  because  there  is  in  each  mention 
of  something  of  the  nature  of  a  hindrance  or  check 
on  an  otherwise  determined  course.  The  present 
writer  has  given  his  reasons  for  thinking  that  there  is 
no    connection    whatever    between    the    acrOeveia    ryj? 


LOCALITY  OF  CHURCHES   OF  GALATIA.     69 

a-apKog  of  the  Epistle,  and  the  prohibition  of  the  Acts. 
And  sufficient  reasons  have  been  given  for  refusing 
to  read  the  aa-Oiveta  t;7?  (rapKog  into  Acts  xvi.  6,  as  the 

explanation  of-    J''\  n '^       rhv  ^pvylav  koi  TaXariKrjv 
^  I  dieXtlovTeg      >        r    / 

X(opav.      So  then  the  aaOei/eia  must   be  looked  for  on 

some  other  occasion  in  the  Apostle's  travels. 

Professor   Eamsay,    in    his  St.    Paul    the    Traveller 

and    Roma,n    Citizen,   has    made   a    not   unreasonable 

suggestion,    that    the    Apostle   was    afflicted    with    a 

serious  attack  of  fever  on  his  first  missionary  journey, 

when   he   was   in   the   lowlands   of  Pamphylia/      The 

present  writer  does  not  enlarge  on  this  suggestion  as, 

after  all,  it  is  a  matter  of  conjecture  pure  and  simple. 

The   suggestion  may,   or   may   not,   appeal   to   critics. 

But  it  may  be  said  that  at  any  rate  it  is  as  reasonable 

an  attempt   to   fix  the   aa-Oeveia  in  point   of  time,  as 

is  that  of  North  Galatians,  who  place  it  in  Acts  xvi.  6 

as  the  explanation  of  SujXOov  Tt]v  ^pvylav  koi  TaXar- 

LKi]v  x^P«^'      Unless  the  arguments   of  chapter  iii.  of 

this    essay    be    utterly   wrong,    the   KwXvOevreg   clause 

of  Acts  xvi.  6  cannot  have  any  connection  with  what 

is   called   an  aaSeveia  ri;?  crapKog  in   Gal.  iv.  13.      So 

that,  in   either  case,  whether  we  hold   the   North  or 

South   Galatian  theory,  we  must  allow  that  St.  Luke 

says  nothing  about  the  sickness  or  bodily  weakness. 

Another  argument  derived  from  the  Epistle  in 
favour  of  the  North  Galatian  theory,  is  St.  Paul's  mode 
of  address  to  the  Galatians  in  iii.  1.  He  writes:  w 
av6y]T0L   VaXoLTaL   Tig  vjuLug  e/BacTKauev  k.t.X.]    Does  not 

^  Sf.  Paul  the  Traveller,  ch.  v. 


70  THE  EPISTLE    TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

this  appellation  VoXaTai  suggest  that  those  to  whom 
the  Epistle  was  addressed  were  nationally  Galatians  ? 

Let  it  be  conceded  that  this  is  a  good  argument  for 
the  North  Galatian  school.  Indeed  it  may  be  said 
to  be  the  strongest  argument  of  all.  Yet  to  the 
present  writer  it  seems  that  Bishop  Lightfoot  has 
carried  it  too  far.  In  his  footnote  in  Colossians,  p.  26, 
he  says:  "Even  granting  that  the  Christian  com- 
munities of  Lycaonia  and  Pisidia  could  by  a  straining 
of  language  be  called  churches  of  Galatia,  is  it  possible 
that  St.  Paul  would  address  them  personally  as  '  ye 
foolish  Galatians '  ?  Such  language  would  be  no  more 
appropriate  than  if  a  modern  preacher  in  a  familiar 
address  were  to  appeal  to  the  Poles  of  Warsaw,  as,  '  ye 
Eussians,'  or  the  Hungarians  of  Pesth  as  'ye  Austrians,' 
or  the  Irish  of  Cork  as  'ye  Englishmen.'" 

Now  these  illustrations  are  not  fair.  To  single  out 
Poles,  Irishmen,  and  Hungarians,  and  to  compare  an 
appeal  to  them  as  Ptussians,  Englishmen,  and  Austrians 
with  the  appeal  to  the  Christians  of  the  province 
of  Galatia  as  Galatians,  is  to  ignore  the  fact  that  while 
Poles  and  Irishmen  notoriously  hate  their  rulers,  whom 
they  regard  as  despotic,  and  while  Hungarians  are 
so  specially  proud  of  their  nationality  that  even  the 
monarchy  which  they  own  must  acknowledge  itself  to 
be  Austro-Hungarian,  and  not  simply  Austrian,  there 
is  no  evidence  that  the  people  of  Antioch,  Iconium, 
Lystra,  and  Derbe,  objected  to  be  reminded  of  their 
connection   with  the  Eoman  Empire. 

But  though  Bishop  Lightfoot  carries  his  argument 
a  little  too  far,  the  case  is  really  stronger  than  might 
at  lirst  appear.      We  have  lately  had  an  opportunity 


LOCALITY  OF  CHURCHES   OF  G ALALIA.      71 

of  observing  the  unreadiness  of  one  nation  to  accept 
the  name  of  another  nation,  with  which  its  political 
destinies  are  closely  linked.  Thus  Scotchmen,  loyal 
to  the  throne  which  is  the  throne  of  England  as  of 
Scotland,  have  shown  that  they  dislike  to  be  called 
Eno'lishmen  :  and  if  some  name  is  needed  to  include 
English  and  Scotch  alike,  it  must  be  one  that  declares 
no  preference  for  either  people,  and  includes  them 
both.  This  the  epithet  British  seems  to  do,  though 
Englishmen  might  reasonably  object  to  this  as 
being  more  applicable  to  Scots  than  to  the  English. 
But  no  exception  is  taken  to  this  name  by  Englishmen, 
because  England  has  never  considered  herself  to  cease 
to  be  British  in  spite  of  her  admixture  of  other  blood. 
In  the  case  before  us  a  common  epithet  is  needed 
for  the  inhabitants  of  the  whole  of  Southern  Galatia, 
for  Lycaonians  and  some  who  were  Phrygians.  It  is 
clear  then  that  no  mode  of  address  will  be  suitable 
unless  it  be  neutral  in  regard  to  both  peoples.  Neither 
group  of  inhabitants  being  Galatian  by  blood,  yet  both 
being  of  Galatia  as  members  of  the  Eoman  province  of 
that  name,  we  have  in  the  address  TaXdruL  a  word 
suited  to  both  without  a  preference  for  either,  and 
it  would  be  difficult  to  find  any  other  name  of  which 
this  could  be  said. 

So  then,  while  ready  to  acknowledge  that  the 
address,  w  upojjtol  TaXdrai,  seems  specially  appropriate 
to  North  Galatians,  the  present  writer  does  not  feel 
the  force  of  Bishop  Lightfoot's  comparisons,  and  cer- 
tainly he  does  not  think  this  argument  an  insuperable 
difficulty  to  the  South  Galatian  theory.  In  conceding 
that  the  address  is  suitable  to  North  Galatians,  we  do 


72  THE  EPISTLE   TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

not  allow  that  it  is  vmsuitable  for  South  Galatians, 
unless  it  can  be  shewn  that  some  other  name  would  be 
more  appropriately  applied  to  them.  It  is  not  easy  to 
find  any  other  collective  name  by  which  St.  Paul  could 
have  addressed  the  Christians  of  South  Galatia,  suppos- 
ing him  to  be  addressing  them.^ 

Again,  Bishop  Lightfoot  makes  much  in  his  Com- 
mentary on  the  Epistle  to  the  Galatians  of  the 
naturalness  of  the  Galatian  defection.^  The  Gauls,  he 
reminds  us,  have  always  been  fickle,  and  so  he  argues 
that  their  apostasy  from  the  purity  of  the  Gospel  is 
characteristic  of  the  people. 

This  psychological  argument  is  really  worth  nothing 
to  determine  the  destination  of  the  Epistle,  Were  its 
destination  known  certainly  from  other  sources  to  be 
North  Galatia,  then  Bishop  Lightfoot's  explanation  of 
the  naturalness  of  the  Galatian  apostasy  would  be  of 
interest.  But  it  is  too  unreliable  a  form  of  argument 
in  the  absence  of  any  such  knowledge.^     To  the  present 

^  Since  this  was  written  I  have  read  Professor  Ramsay's  arguments 
in  The  Expositor,  August,  1898,  under  "Galatians  and  Gauls."  To 
these  attention  may  be  drawn. 

2  See  his   first  Essay  in   his   Galatians. 

^  See  article  in  Smith's  Diet,  of  Bible  (2nd  ed.)  on  "Epistle 
to  Gal."  The  contrast  between  this  article  and  that  of  the  old 
edition  is  striking.  See  also  Church  in  the  Roman  Empire,  pp.  105,  6. 
Professor  Eamsay's  smiles  can  be  seen  through  his  words  as  he 
writes  :  "It  is  certainly  a  sound  principle  to  compare  the  qualities 
implied  in  St.  Paul's  Epistles  with  the  national  character  of  the 
persons  addressed  ;  but  national  character  is  a  very  delicate  subject 
to  deal  with,  and  the  Celtic  faults  and  qualities  are  certainly  over- 
stated by  some  of  the  commentators.  The  climax  of  imaginative 
insight  into  national  character  is  reached  by  some  Germans,  who 
consider  the  population  of  North  Galatia  to  be  not  Celtic  but 
Germanic,  and  discover  in  the  Galatians  of  the  Epistle  the  qualities 
of  their  own  nation." 


LOCALITY  OF  CHURCHES   OF  GALATIA.     73 

writer  it    does  not  seem  worthy  of  any  further  con- 
sideration. 

Lastly,  there  is  the  argument  based  on  the  use  of 
TO  Trporepov  in  Gal.  iv.  18.  Bishop  Lightfoot^  under- 
stands TO  irporepov  to  mean  on  the  former  occasion,  and 
so  concludes  that,  when  the  Epistle  to  the  Galatians 
was  written,  the  Apostle  had  visited  Galatia  twice,  and 
twice  only.  Further,  according  to  Lightfoot,  the 
Epistle  to  the  Galatians  was  written  between  the  first 
Epistle  to  the  Corinthians  and  the  Epistle  to  the 
Romans.  So,  then,  as  these  two  were  composed  on 
the  third  missionary  journey  after  Ephesus  was 
reached,  and  as,  before  the  Epistle  to  the  Galatians 
St.  Paul  had  only  visited  Galatia  tioice,  whereas, 
according  to  the  South  Galatian  interpretation  of 
FaXaTf/co?  in  the  Acts  there  must  have  been  three 
visits  to  Galatia  before  Ephesus  was  reached  on 
the  third  journey,  therefore  the  South  Galatian  School 
is  lodged  in  a  contradiction  which  tells  against  their 
theory. 

But  in  answer  to  this  it  may  be  said  that  those  who 
locate  the  Churches  of  Galatia  in  South  Galatia  do  not 
hold  themselves  bound  by  Lightfoot's  date  of  the 
Epistle  to  the  Galatians.  For  example  Piamsay, 
who  also  interprets  to  irpoTepov  as  Lightfoot  does, 
dates  the  Galatian  Epistle  from  Antioch  before  the 
third  missionary  journey  began.  With  this,  however, 
the  present  writer  does  not  find  himself  in  agreement. 
He  thinks  that  Bishop  Lightfoot's  chronological  arrange- 
ment  of   the    Epistles   is   correct,   for   reasons   to    be 

^  See  his  note  in  Galatians. 


74  THE  EPISTLE    TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

stated  in  later  chapters  ;  but  he  ventures  to 
differ  from  both  Lightfoot  and  Eamsay  in  their  inter- 
pretation of  TO  irpoTepov ;  and  he  will  now  proceed  to 
give  his  reasons  for  thinking  that  to  irpoTepov  is 
used  in  Gal.  iv.  13  in  the  sense  oi  formerly,  and  that 
the  expression  does  not  imply  the  exact  number  of 
two  visits  to  Galatia  prior  to  the  writing  of  the 
Epistle. 

Lightfoot  in  his  note  in  loc.  says  that  to  irpoTepov 
cannot  be  simply  equivalent  to  irdXai,  "  some  time  ago." 
This  one  must  agree  with.  He  then  goes  on  to  say 
that  it  may  mean  "  formerly,"  with  a  direct  and 
emphatic  reference  to  some  later  point  of  time.  In 
this  sense  it  is  certainly  used  in  Joh.  vi.  62  ;  ix.  8  ; 
1  Tim.  i.  13.  Or  it  may  mean  "on  the  former  of 
two  occasions."  He  prefers  this  latter  interpreta- 
tion because  it  is  difficult  to  explain  the  emphasis 
implied  in  the  use  of  the  article  to  if  we  assign 
to  ivpoTepov  the  other  meaning.  But,  with  all  defer- 
ence to  Lightfoot's  opinion,  the  emphasis  is  clear 
enough  if  only  we  read  verses  14  ff.  with  13.  It 
is  not  that  the  Apostle  says  simply :  "  Ye  know 
that  on  account  of  an  infirmity  of  the  flesh  I 
preached  the  Gospel  to  you  to  irpoTcpov"  We  must 
not  break  the  sense  but  read  right  on :  "  And 
that  which  was  a  temptation  to  you  in  my  flesh 
ye  despised  not  nor  rejected,  but  ye  received  me  as 
an  angel  of  God,  even  as  Christ  Jesus.  Where, 
then,  is  that  gratulation  of  yourselves  ?  For  I 
bear  you  witness  that,  if  possible,  ye  would  have 
plucked  out  your   eyes  and  given  them   to   me.      So, 


LOCALITY  OF  CHURCHES   OF  GALATIA.      75 

then,  am  I  become  your  enemy  because  I  tell  you 
the   truth  ? " 

Here  surely  is  the  explanation  of  the  emphasis.  It 
is  a  contrast  between  then  and  now.  Then  (to 
irpoTepov)  though  he  was  afflicted  with  bodily  weak- 
ness, they  were  ready  to  sacrifice  anything  for  him — 
71010  ^  he  is  become  their  enemy.  To  disregard  the 
connection  of  vv.  14-16  with  what  is  gone  before  is  to 
lose  the  sense  of  the  whole  passage.  As  well  stop  at 
TO.  KoXa  epya  in  our  Lord's  words  in  St.  Matt.  v.  16, 
thereby  entirely  missing  the  point  of  His  exhortation, 
which  is  that  God  may  have  glory  and  not  that  men 
may  see  our  good  works,  as  check  the  sense  of  this 
passage  in  the  Epistle  by  disconnecting  vv.  14  ff.  from 
V.  13^. 

It  is  surprising  that  Bishop  Lightfoot  missed  this 
point.  Maybe  the  explanation  is  to  be  found  in  the 
fact  that  the  North  Galatian  theory  already  seemed  to 
him  so  strong,  and  the  interpretation  of  to  irporepov 
to  mean  on  the  former  occasion  to  agree  so  exactly 
with  it,  that  he  did  not  see  the  force  of  the  other 
rendering. 

It  may  even  be  questioned  whether  the  rendering 
"  on  the  former  of  my  visits  "  is  admissible  here.  For 
if  the  comparative  force  of  the  adverb  be  insisted  on, 
the  sentence  strictly  means  :  Through  an  infirmity  of 
the  flesh  I  preached  the  Gospel  on  the  former  of  the 
two  occasions  ichen  I  lyreacliecl  the  Gospel.  And  it  is 
open  to  very  serious   question  whether  a  second  visit 

^  The  word  "now"  does   not,   it  is  true,   occur,  but  may   well 
be  implied   in  ye^ova.     In   effect  it  is   there  though  not  in  actual 
act. 


76  THE  EPISTLE   TO    THE   GA'LATIANS. 

could  be  called  preaching  the  Gospel  in  New  Testament 
language.^  Evangelizing  would  be  the  work  of  the 
first  visit,  "  confirming  "  WT)uld  be  the  purpose  of  the 
later  visits.  So  that  the  Apostle  would  hardly  speak 
of  himself  as  'preaching  the  Gospel  a  second  time  in  the 
same  place. 

It  does  not  seem  to  the  present  writer  that  the 
expression  to  irporepov  need  be  interpreted  on  the 
former  occasion  even  on  the  North  Galatian  hypothesis. 
The  rendering  formerly  accords  better  with  the  sense  of 
the  passage  in  which  it  occurs. 

So,  then,  of  the  four  arguments  derived  from  the 
Epistle  in  favour  of  its  North  Galatian  destination, 
viz.  : 

(1)  The  acrOei/eia  rrj^  crapKog  argument. 

(2)  The  psychological  argument. 

(3)  The  TO  irpoTcpov  argument. 

(4)  The  w  TaXarcxL  argument. 

The  last  only  seems  to  have  any  real  value.  And  this  is 
indeed  a  slender  thread  on  which  to  hang  so  heavy  a 
conclusion. 

On  the  other  hand  there  are  not  wanting  in  the 
Epistle  evidences  of  its  South  Galatian  destinatiou. 
Thus,  for  example,  that  Gal.  v.  11  has  reference  to  St. 
Paul's  conduct  in  regard  to  Timothy  (Acts  xvi.  3)  is 
recognised  even  by  Lightfoot.^     "  But  I,  brethren,  if  I 

^  I  allow  that  St.  Paul's  words  in  Rom.  i.  15  may  be  thought  to 
tell  against  me.  But  they  were  written  before  St.  Paul  himself  had 
been  to  Rome.     Moreover,  the  phrase  vfuv  Toh  kv  'F(J}/J.ri  is  general. 

^  Note  on  Gal.  v.  11. 


LOCALITY  OF  CHURCHES   OF  GALATIA.      77 

still  preach  circumcision,  why  am  I  still  persecuted  ? " 
Here,  doubtless,  there  is  an  allusion  to  the  argument 
used  by  the  Judaisers  that  Paul  had  himself  recognised 
the  validity,  and  perhaps,  also,  the  necessity  of  circum- 
cision by  having  Timothy  circumcised.  Timothy  was 
of  Lystra  in  South  Galatia.  Certainly  the  point  of  the 
attack  on  St.  Paul  is  sharpened  if  we  suppose  that  the 
Epistle  was  addressed  to  those  who  had  themselves 
known  Timothy,  and  who  knew  too  how  St.  Paul  had 
acted  in  regard  to  him. 

And  we  cannot  be  accused  of  unfairness  if  we  say 
that  we  see  a  reference  in  Gal.  iv.  14  to  the  events 
recorded  in  Acts  xiv.  1 1  ff.  The  words,  "  As  an  angel 
of  God  ye  received  me,"  certainly  gain  in  point  if  they 
were  addressed  to  the  Christians  of  Lystra  among 
others.  And  it  is  worth  while  to  notice  that  this 
reference  does  not  stand  alone,  but  we  have  just  such 
another  in  Gal.  i.  8,  9,  "  But  though  we,  or  an  angel 
from  heaven  should  preach  unto  you  any  gospel  other 
than  that  which  is  preached  unto  you  let  him  be 
anathema." 

It  cannot  fairly  be  argued,  as  has  been  done  by 
members  of  the  South  Galatian  school,  e.g.,  Eenan  and 
Eamsay,^  that  the  mention  of  Barnabas  in  the  Epistle 
betrays  the  fact  that  he  was  personally  known  to  the 
Galatians.  It  may,  I  think,  reasonably  be  said  that 
the  manner  in  which  Barnabas  is  introduced  proves 
him  to  have  been  known  at  any  rate  by  name.      But 

^  It  is  due  to  Professor  Ramsay  to  say  that  he  does  not  see  any 
"  great  value  in  this  argument."  The  Church  in  the  Roynan  Emjnre, 
p.  97.  It  would  be  fairer  to  say  that  the  argument  is  invalid  as  is 
here  demonstrated. 


78  THE  EPISTLE    TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

beyond  this  we  cannot  go,  as  Bishop  Lightfoot  has 
clearly  shewn  by  his  reference  to  the  allusion  to 
Barnabas  in  1  Cor.  ix.  6.^  We  have  no  more  right  to 
argue  that  Barnabas  was  personally  known  to  the 
Churches  of  Galatia  than  we  have  to  say  that  St. 
Paul's  reference  to  him  in  1  Corinthians  proves  him  to 
have  been  known  to  the  Corinthians.  We  have  not 
the  least  reason  to  suppose  that  Barnabas  was  personally 
known  at  Corinth.  In  fact  we  have  every  reason  to 
think  he  was  not,  for  he  was  not  with  St.  Paul  on  his 
second  missionary  journey  when  Corinth  was  first 
evangelised. 

While  then  we  have  reasons  for  considering  that 
Barnabas  was  known  by  name  to  the  Churches  of 
Galatia  we  must  not  therefore  assume  any  'personal 
acquaintance  between  them.  James  and  Cephas  and 
John  are  introduced  in  the  Epistle  to  the  Galatians  as 
those  with  whose  names  its  readers  would  be  well 
acquainted.  But  no  one  is  likely  to  argue  that  these 
three  were  personally  known  in  the  churches  of 
Galatia.  That  their  names  were  familiar  is  of  course 
most  natural,  for  tlie  Judaising  teachers  who  were 
troubling  the  Galatian  churches,  had,  as  we  can  see  from 
St.  Paul's  own  reference  to  the  Three  as  ol  SoKovi^re^ 
G-TvXoi  elpai,  been  extolling  them  as  the  true  pillars  of 
the  Church ;  this  metaphor,  according  to  Lightfoot,^ 
being  commonly  used  by  the  Jews  in  speaking  of  the 
great  teachers  of  the  law.  St.  Paul's  Apostolic  author- 
ity on  the  other  hand  was  disputed  by  the  Judaisers, 
and  it  would  seem  to  follow  from  the  connection  of  the 
name  of  Barnabas  with  that  of  Paul  in   1   Cor.  ix.  6 

1  Colossians,  p.  28,  footnote.  ^See  his  note  on  Gal.  ii.  9. 


LOCALITY  OF  CHURCHES   OF  GALATIA.     79 

that  Barnabas,  like  St.  Paul,  was  represented  by  this 
party  as  one  of  inferior  authority,  he  being  known  as 
a  prominent  champion  of  Gentile  freedom  from  the 
bondage  of  the  Jewish  law  (Gal.  ii).  So  then  even  if 
the  churches  of  Galatia  be  in  North  Galatia,  whither 
the  Judaisers  have  penetrated,  the  name  of  Barnabas 
might  quite  well  have  become  familiar  to  the  Galatians 
there. 

But  (and  this  is  a  point  of  some  importance)  the 
presence  of  Jewish  emissaries  presupposed  in  the 
Galatian  Epistle  is  more  natural  and  probable  in 
South  Galatia  than  in  the  "  semi-barbarous "  regions 
of  the  North.  For,  even  granting  the  North  Galatian 
contention  that  St.  Paul  visited  North  Galatia  because 
of  special  divine  guidance  thereto,  and  in  spite  of  the 
fact  that  the  route  thereto  was  an  unnatural  one  to 
take,  the  same  cannot  be  said  of  the  Judaisers,  who 
would  naturally  follow  the  more  ordinary  line  of  com- 
munication leading  into  Asia.  It  is  contended  by 
Professor  Eamsay  that  "  the  development  and  import- 
ance of  the  territory  on  the  northern  side  of  the 
plateau — i.e.  Northern  Galatia  and  Northern  Phrygia 
— belong  to  the  period  following  after  292  A.D.,  and 
result  from  the  transference  of  the  centre  of  govern 
ment,  first  to  Nicomedia  and  afterwards  to  Constanti- 
nople. Under  the  earlier  Eoman  Empire,  the  southern 
side  of  the  plateau  was  far  more  important  than  the 
northern  side."  This  argument,  which  Professor 
Eamsay  has  worked  out  at  length  in  his  Historical 
Geography  of  Asia,  Minor,  is  really  a  very  valuable 
piece  of  corroborative  evidence.      It  does  not  of  itself 


80  THE  EPISTLE    TO    THE   GALATL4NS. 

prove  anything  to  do  with  the  present  inquiry 
absolutely,  but  it  is  a  strong  confirmation  of  con- 
clusions reached  on  other  grounds. 

The  present  writer  has  purposely  abstained  from 
any  attempt  to  develop  this  line  of  argument  in  this 
essay,  for  he  does  not  pretend  to  have  made  it  his 
own.  But  Professor  Kamsay's  suggested  interpretation 
of  Ty]v  ^pvy'iav  koi  TaXariKt]p  X^P^^  (^^  interpretation, 
be  it  noticed,  derived  from  an  acquaintance  with  the 
history  of  Asia  Minor)  appeared  so  natural  and  likely, 
that  it  seemed  to  have  become  necessary  to  examine 
its  bearing  on  the  meaning  of  Acts  xvi.  6  ff.  resulting 
from  it.  Hence  the  development  of  the  present 
essay. 

There  is  yet  one  more  allusion  in  the  Galatian 
Epistle  which  has  seemed  to  favour  the  South  Galatian 
theory.  It  is  said  that  the  use  of  r'/xa?  in  Galatians 
ii.  5  points  to  a  South  Galatian  destination  for  the 
Epistle.     This  is  worth  examining. 

The  visit  to  Jerusalem  which  forms  the  subject  of  the 
second  chapter  of  the  Epistle  is  difficult  to  identify  with 
certainty.  Professor  Ptamsay  calls  this  "  the  greatest 
historical  problem  of  St.  Paul's  life."  The  disputed 
point  is  whether  this  visit  to  Jerusalem  is  to  be 
identified  with  the  visit  of  Acts  xi.  30  or  with  the 
later  one  recorded  in  Acts  xv.  It  is  not  necessary 
for  our  present  purpose  to  discuss  this  question.  A 
consideration  of  it  is  reserved  for  the  Appendix. 
But  we  may  notice  that  on  either  hypothesis  the  visit 
to  Jerusalem  preceded  the  second  missionary  journey. 
At  that  time  the  churches  of  Galatia,  on  the  North 


LOCALITY  OF  CHURCHES   OF  GALATIA.     81 

Galatian  theory,  were  non-existent ;  for  their  found- 
ation was  a  result  of  the  second  journey.  So  then  it 
is  argued  that  St.  Paul  could  not  have  spoken  of  his 
resistance  to  the  demands  of  the  Judaisers  as  being 
"  that  the  truth  of  the  Gospel  might  continue  loith 
you "    (Iva    r)    aXijOeia    rod    evayyeKlov    Sia/memj    Trpos 

I  must  candidly  confess  that  I  do  not  feel  that  this 
is  necessarily  correct,  for  by  i^/xa?  St.  Paul  may  only 
mean  you  Gentiles.  The  use  of  uyua?  need  not  of 
necessity  imply  that  the  Galatians  were  already 
Christianised  when  the  conference  at  Jerusalem  took 
place.  The  reference  to  them  as  of  the  number  of 
those  for  w^hose  benefit  St.  Paul  was  contendinej  mioht 
be  explained  by  understanding  that  the  Apostle's 
claims  on  their  behalf  were  prospective  and  not  yet 
actual.  It  was  a  matter  of  princijjle  that  St.  Paul 
was  contending  for,  and  not  any  special  converts.  He 
would  not  have  the  Gentiles  entangled  in  the  yoke  of 
Jewish  bondage. 

It  does  not  then  appear  that  the  use  of  vjuag  is 
fatal  to  the  North  Galatian  theory. 

For,  again,  if  it  were  fatal  to  the  North  Galatian 
theory,  it  would  be  equally  fatal  to  the  opposite  theory 
if  it  could  be  proved  independently  that  the  visit  to 
Jerusalem  mentioned  in  Gal.  ii.  is  to  be  identified 
with  the  visit  of  Acts  xi.  30.  Now,  it  is  interesting 
to  observe  that  Professor  Eamsay  does  so  identify  it,^ 
so  that  according  to  him  v/uug  is  prospectively  used 
even  on  the  South  Galatian  theory.  When,  then,  in 
touching  on  the  i^m"?  argument  as  one  in  favour  of  the 

1  St.  Paul  the  Traveller  and  Roman  Citizen,  chap.  iii. 
F 


82  THE  EPISTLE    TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

South  Galatian  theory  and  adverse  to  the  other  theory, 
he  says,  "  This  is  a  good  point,  though  slight,"  ^  I  must 
confess  he  seems  to  me  guilty  of  inconsistency.  I  fear 
lest  such  inconsistency  should  retard  the  acceptance  of 
his  South  Galatian  theory,  which,  in  itself,  is  a  per- 
fectly consistent  one,  and,  as  I  have  tried  to  show,  the 
correct  one.^ 

^  Church  in  Roman  Emjnre,  p.  101. 

2  It  is  much  to  be  regretted  that  Professor  Ramsay  tries  to  prove 
more  than  one  thing  at  a  time.     See  Preface  to  this  essay. 


CHAPTEE  VI. 

THE  CORROBOEATIVE  EVIDENCE  OF  ACTS  XX.  4. 

At  this  stage  of  the  argument  it  may  be  well,  before 
passing  on  to  investigate  the  elate  of  the  Galatian 
Epistle  (to  which  inquiry  we  shall  come  in  the  next 
chapter),  to  educe  an  interesting  and  not  unimportant 
piece  of  corroborative  evidence  afforded  by  the  list  of 
names  given  in  Acts  xx.  4.^ 

But  it  will  be  necessary  to  institute  a  preliminary 
inquiry  into  the  dates  of  three  of  St.  Paul's  Epistles. 
This  must  not  be  looked  upon  as  digression;  for  it  is, 
as  will  presently  appear,  a  necessary  part  of  the  argu- 
ment. 

There  can  be  no  reasonable  doubt  that  St.  Paul's 
first  Epistle  to  the  Corinthians  was  written  from 
Ephesus  towards  the  close  of  his  three  years'  sojourn 
there  on  his  third  missionary  journey  (Acts  xix.). 
That  this  Epistle  dates  from  Ephesus  is  now  generally 
recognised  to  be  a  conclusion  from  St.  Paul's  own 
statement  in  the  Epistle :  ''  I  will  tarry  (or  am  tarry- 

^  It  is  hardly  necessary  to  acknowledge  how  writers  subsequent  to 
Paley  are  indebted  to  him  for  his  Horae  Pauliuae. 


84  THE  EPISTLE   TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

ing,  eiTLfjievoo)  at  Ephesus  until  Pentecost ;  for  a  great 
door  and  effectual  is  opened  unto  me,  and  there  are 
many  adversaries"  (1  Cor.  xvi.  8,  9).  That  these 
words  do  not  point  to  an  intended  visit  to  Ephesus 
still  in  the  future,  in  the  same  way  that  the  words 
"  I  do  pass  through  Macedonia "  (NLaKe^ovlav  yap 
Siep-^ojuat,  1  Cor.  xvi.  5)  express  only  a  future 
intention  of  the  Apostle  in  regard  to  Macedonia, 
seems  clear  from  an  earlier  reference  in  the  Epistle, 
where  St.  Paul  speaks  of  his  "  fighting  with  beasts  at 
Ephesus " ;  ^  an  expression  which  shows  him  to  be 
already  there. 

And  as  the  Epistle  dates  from  Ephesus,  the  three 
years'  stay  there  recorded  in  Acts  xix.  seems  to  be  the 
only  likely  occasion  when  the  Epistle  could  have  been 
written,  for  the  Apostle's  visit  to  that  city  on  the 
second  journey  was  very  short.  Further,  that  the 
three  years'  stay  was  drawing  to  a  close  is  suggested 
by  St.  Paul's  expressed  intention  of  shortly  leaving 
the  city  to  visit  Achaia  by  way  of  Macedonia — an 
intention  which  is  also  recorded  in  Acts  xix.  21. 

It  is  fortunate  then  that  so  close  an  approximation 
to  the  date  of  the  first  Epistle  to  Corinth  can  be 
obtained. 

Nor  is  there  much  difficulty  in  approximating  to 
the  time  when  the  second  Epistle  was  written.  For, 
from  the  contents  of  this  Epistle  we  can  gather  that  it 
was  written  not  long  after  the  first,  and  that  it  was 
the  result  of  the  information  brought  by  Titus  as  to 
the  effect  produced  by  the  first  Epistle  on  the 
Corinthian  Church.      That  St.  Paul  had  awaited  news 

1  1  Cor.  XV.  82. 


LOCALITY  OF  CHURCHES  OF  GALATIA.     85 

of  the  effect  produced  by  his  letter  with  anxiety  is 
clear  from  his  words  in  2  Cor.  ii.  12,  13:  "Now 
when  I  came  to  Troas  for  the  Gospel  of  Christ,  and 
when  a  door  wtis  opened  unto  me  in  the  Lord,  I  had 
no  relief  for  my  spirit,  because  I  found  not  Titus  my 
brother ;  but  taking  my  leave  of  them,  I  went  forth 
into  Macedonia."  Here  the  relief  came,  as  the 
following  verses  imply,  but  not  at  once ;  for  in  2  Cor. 
vii.  5  ff.  we  read :  "  For  even  when  we  were  come 
into  Macedonia,  our  flesh  had  no  relief,  but  we  were 
afflicted  on  every  side ;  without  were  fightings,  within 
were  fears.  Nevertheless  He  that  comforteth  the 
lowly,  even  Cod,  comforted  us  by  the  coming  of  Titus; 
and  not  by  his  coming  only,  but  also  by  the  comfort 
wherewith  he  was  comforted  in  you,  while  he  told  us 
your  longing,  your  mourning,  your  zeal  for  me ;  so  that 
I  rejoiced  yet  more." 

The  relating  of  these  personal  experiences  on  the 
part  of  the  Apostle  brings  clearly  before  us  the  cir- 
cumstances of  the  writing  of  the  second  Epistle. 
After  despatching  the  first  Epistle,  St.  Paul  had 
concluded  his  stay  at  Ephesus,  possibly  abruptly,  and 
had  then  gone  to  Troas,  where  he  hoped  to  meet  Titus 
with  news  of  the  Corinthians.  Titus  was  not  there ; 
and  the  suspense  endured  by  the  Apostle  was  greater 
than  he  could  bear.  He  left  Troas  in  spite  of  the  fact 
that  "  a  door  was  opened  "  to  him  there,  and  crossed 
to  Macedonia,  where,  after  further  anxiety  on  the 
Apostle's  part,  Titus  at  length  met  him.  Eelieved  in 
part,  though  still  weighed  down  by  care,  as  the  Epistle 
itself  shows,  St.  Paul  wrote  the  second  Epistle  to  the 
Corinthians. 


86  THE   EPISTLE    TO    THE   GALATIANS, 

Both  Epistles  to  Corinth  then  were  compositions  of 
the  third  missionary  journey.  So  also  was  the  Epistle 
to  the  Romans,  as  the  following  considerations  show. 

From  the  second  Epistle  to  the  Corinthians  we 
learn  that,  at  the  time  that  letter  was  written,  there 
was  going  on  in  the  churches  of  St.  Paul's  founding  a 
collection  of  alms  intended  for  the  poor  Christian  Jews 
in  Jerusalem.  That  the  collection  was  one  already  in 
progress  is  shown  by  St.  Paul's  words  in  2  Cor.  ix. 
1,  2  :  "For  as  touching  the  ministering  to  the  saints 
{rri^  SiaKoviag  rrjg  eig  tov?  ayiov^),  it  is  superfluous  for 
me  to  write  to  you :  for  I  know  your  readiness,  of 
which  I  glory  on  your  behalf  to  them  of  Macedonia, 
that  Achaia  hath  been  prepared  for  a  year  past."  And 
that  the  offering  was  meant  for  Jerusalem  is  made 
clear  by  a  previous  reference  to  this  collection  in  the 
first  Epistle  to  Corinth  (xvi.  1 ) :  "  Now  concerning  the 
collection  for  the  saints  (irepl  Se  rrjg  Xoyia^  Trj^  eig 
Toug  aylovg),  as  I  gave  order  to  the  churches  of 
Galatia,  so  also  do  ye.  Upon  the  first  day  of  the 
week  let  each  one  of  you  lay  by  him  in  store,  as  he 
may  prosper,  that  no  collections  be  made  when  I 
come.  And  when  I  arrive,  whomsoever  ye  shall 
approve  by  letters,  them  will  I  send  to  carry  your 
hounty  unto  Jerusalem :  and  if  it  be  meet  for  me  to  go 
also,  they  shall  go  with  me." 

We  know  further  that  St.  Paul  afterwards  decided 
that  it  was  meet  for  him  to  go  to  Jerusalem  ;  and  we 
find  him  writing  to  the  Ptomans  (xv.  25,  26):  "But 
now  I  go  unto  Jerusalem,  ministering  unto  the 
saints  {SiaKovwv  roh  ayioig).  For  it  hath  been  the 
good   pleasure   of  Macedonia   and   Achaia  to  make  a 


LOCALITY  OF  CHURCHES   OF  GALATIA.      87 

certain  contribution  (Koivcoviav)  for  the  poor  among  the 
saints  that  are  at  Jerusalem." 

It  is  not  likely  that  any  one  will  question  that  the 
KOLvwvia  here  spoken  of  is  in  effect  the  same  as  the 
SiaKovla  of  2  Cor.  ix.  1,  for  the  identification  is  secured 
by  the  words   Siukovwu  roh  aylot^.      Further,  both  in 

1  Corinthians  and  Eomans  the  contribution  is  one 
intended  for  the  "  saints  "  in  Jerusalem. 

We  may  then  assume  that  all  three  Epistles  are 
dealing  with  the  same  collection,  or  ministering,  or 
hounty ;  and  we  see  then  how  the  expressed  intention 
of  St.  Paul  in  writing  to  the  Eomans  to  go  now  {vwl) 
to    Jerusalem    fixes    the    Koman    Epistle    later    than 

2  Corinthians.  Whether  it  was  written  from  Corinth 
or  not,  it  too  is  a  composition  of  the  third  missionary 
journey. 

But  we  may  further  lay  it  down  as  all  but  proved 
that  the  Eoman  Epistle  was  written  from  Corinth 
itself.  For,  as  Dr.  Sanday  and  Mr.  Headlam  have 
argued,^  "  The  bearer  of  the  Epistle  appears  to  be  one 
Phoebe  who  is  an  active,  perhaps  an  official,  member 
of  the  Church  of  Cenchreae,  the  harbour  of  Corinth 
(Eom.  xvi.  1).  The  house  in  which  St.  Paul  is 
staying,  which  is  also  the  meeting  place  of  the  local 
church,  belongs  to  Gains  (Eom.  xvi.  23);  and  a  Gains 
St.  Paul  had  baptized  at  Corinth  (1  Cor.  i.  14).  He 
sends  a  greeting  also  from  Erastus,"  who  is  described 
as  '  oeconomus'  or  'treasurer'  of  the  city.  The  office  is  of 
some  importance,  and  points  to  a  city  of  some  import- 
ance.    This   would   agree   with   Corinth ;  and  just   at 

^  See  "Romans"  in  International  Critical  Commentary,  p.  xxxvii. 
2  Rom.  xvi.  23. 


88  THE  EPISTLE   TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

Corinth  we  learn  from  2  Tim.  iv.  20  that  an  Erastus 
was  left  behind  on  St.  Paul's  latest  journey — naturally 
enough  if  it  was  his  home." 

What  we  have  so  far  said  is  necessary  for  our 
present  argument,  and  much  of  it  will  be  useful  in 
a  later  chapter  when  we  come  to  discuss  the  date  of 
Galatian  Epistle.  But  the  dating  of  that  Epistle  has 
nothing  to  do  with  us  now.  That  remains  an  open 
question. 

Eeturning  then  to  the  "  collection  for  the  poor 
saints,"  we  may  remark  now  on  (1)  the  Area  over 
which  the  collection  was  made,  (2)  the  Way  in  which 
it  was  made,  and  (3)  the  Conditions  of  its  Conveyance 
to  Jerusalem. 

1.  The  Area  over  loliicli  the  collection  was  made. 
We  might  suppose  from  the  Epistle  to  the  Romans 
that  the  contribution  came  only  from  Macedonia  and 
Achaia.  For  St.  Paul  makes  mention  only  of  them 
when  he  says :  "  For  it  hath  been  the  good  pleasure  of 
Macedonia  and  Achaia  to  make  a  certain  contribution 
for  the  poor  among  the  saints  that  are  at  Jerusalem."-^ 
But  it  is  clear  from  St.  Paul's  words  to  the  Corinthians 
(xvi.  1),  that  it  was  part  of  his  original  intention  that 
the  churches  of  Galatia  sliould  contribute ;  for  he 
writes :  "  Now  concerning  the  collection  for  the  saints, 
as  I  gave  order  to  the  churches  of  Galatia  so  also  do 
ye."  There  is  no  mention,  however,  anywhere  in  the 
three  Epistles  of  contributions  actual  or  intended  from 
Asia.      But  it  would  be  most  unreasonable  to  assume 

1  Rom.  XV.  26. 


LOCALITY  OF  CHURCHES   OF  GALATIA.     89 

from  this  that  Asia  was  not  asked.  For  St.  Paul  was 
in  Asia  when  he  first  wrote  to  the  Corinthians  about 
the  collection,  and  he  had  then  already  given  orders  in 
the  churches  of  Galatia  respecting  it.  We,  therefore, 
could  not  argue  that  because  Asia  is  not  mentioned  by 
name,  it  was  not  asked.  On  the  contrary  it  is  incon- 
ceivable that  Asia  should  not  be  asked.  And,  being 
asked,  was  Asia  likely  to  refuse  ?  If  it  be  thought 
that  for  any  reason  or  other  the  churches  of  Galatia 
might  fail  to  contribute  at  the  last,  is  it  likely,  or  is  it 
reasonable  to  suggest  that  the  explanation  of  St.  Paul's 
silence  about  Asia  and  Galatia  in  Ptom.  xv.  26  is  that 
loth  failed  to  send  contributions?  A  very  simple 
explanation  of  the  mention  of  only  Macedonia  and 
Achaia  would  be  that  the  Apostle  had  already  when  he 
wrote  to  Eome  got  the  offerings  of  these  churches 
together,  that  he  knew  the  result  of  their  collection, 
for  he  had  passed  through  Macedonia  to  come  to 
Achaia,  but  that  he  did  not  yet  know  what  Asia 
and  Galatia  had  contributed.  There  seems  to  be  in 
the  Apostle's  words,  rjvSoKrja-av  yap  MaKeSovia  koI 
'A')(aia  KOLVMVLuv  TLVU  7ronj(Ta(T0ai  ek  Tovg  TTTCo-^ovg  tcov 
ay'ucv  Tcov  ev  'lepova-aXij/uL,  an  expression  of  satisfaction 
at  the  readiness  with  which  Macedonia  and  Achaia 
had  responded  to  the  appeal  for  alms. 

We  conclude  then  from  these  three  Epistles  that 
Macedonia  and  Achaia  were  asked  and  contributed, 
and  that  Galatia  was  asked  to  contribute.  Whether 
Galatia  refused  we  cannot  tell,  nor  whether  Asia  was 
even  asked  can  we  tell.  But  St.  Paul's  words  in 
the  Epistle  to  the  Eomans  need  not  mean  that  Galatia 
and  Asia  both  failed  to  send  contributions. 


90  THE  EPISTLE    TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

2.  Tlu  Way  in  which  the  collection  was  made.  We 
have  an  insight  into  this  in  the  latter  part  of  the 
eighth  chapter  of  the  second  Epistle  to  the  Corinthians. 
We  gather  from  this  section  (vv.  16  to  24)  that  St. 
Paul  was  sending  to  Corinth  Titus,  who  is  mentioned 
by  name,  along  with  one  whom,  without  naming,  he 
describes  as  "  the  brother  whose  praise  in  the  gospel 
is  spread  through  all  the  churches  ;  and  not  only  so, 
but  who  was  also  appointed  by  the  churches  to  travel 
with  us  in  the  matter  of  this  grace  (eV  rri  xupiTL 
TavTi],  yet  another  word  for  the  SiaKovla)  which  is 
ministered  by  us  to  the  glory  of  the  Lord."  And 
along  with  these  two  the  Apostle  sends  yet  another 
whom  he  describes  as  "  our  brother,  whom  we  have 
many  times  proved  earnest  in  many  things,  but  now 
much  more  earnest  by  reason  of  the  great  confidence 
which  he  hath  in  you." 

These  three  then  St.  Paul  is  sending  to  Corinth, 
carefully  commending  them  to  the  church  as  trust- 
worthy. "  Whether  any  inquire  about  Titus,  he  is  my 
partner  (Koivwvog)  and  fellow-worker  to  you-ward  (e/9 
vjuL(lg  (Tuvepyog) ;  or  our  brethren,  they  are  messengers 
of  the  churches  (a-Troa-roXoi^  e/c/cAj/o-^wi^),  the  glory  of 
Christ."  To  them,  therefore,  are  the  Corinthians 
exhorted  to  give  "  proof  of  their  love,"  and  of  the 
Apostle's  "  glorying  on  their  behalf." 

What  is  meant  by  these  expressions  the  ninth 
chapter  makes  abundantly  clear.  St.  Paul  had  been 
"  glorying "  to  them  of  Macedonia,  that  Achaia  had 
been  prepared  for  a  year  past  in  regard  to  the  minister- 
ing to  the  saints  (2  Cor.  ix.    ],   2).      He  asks  the  Cor- 

^  Delegates  we  might  say. 


LOCALITY  OF  CHURCHES   OF  GALATIA.      91 

inthians  to  justify  this  glorying.  So  then  we  conclude 
that  Titus  and  the  two  brethren  are  being  sent  to  collect 
the  Corinthian  offering  for  the  saints  at  Jerusalem. 

It  is  not  impossible  that  it  was  for  a  similar 
purpose  that  Timothy  was  sent  with  Erastus  to  Mace- 
donia. These  two,  being  as  St.  Luke  says  in  Acts  xix. 
22  ^xjo  Tcov  ^laKovovvToov  avT(p,  did  St.  Paul  send  to 
Macedonia  shortly  before  he  himself  was  to  leave  Asia. 
And  it  seems  probable  from  1  Cor.  xvi.  10  that  the 
Apostle  had  originally  intended  Timothy  to  go  on  to 
Corinth  from  Macedonia,  but  that  there  was  some 
doubt  whether  he  would  get  as  far.  It  is  certainly 
worth  noticing  that  the  mention  of  Timothy  in  this 
passage  occurs  just  after  the  instructions  respecting 
the  "  collection  for  the  saints."  That  Timothy  did  go 
to  Corinth  ultimately  we  know,  for  he  sends  salutations 
to  Eome  (Eom.  xvi.  21),  and  that  he  went  with  St. 
Paul  himself  is  also  probable,  for  he  was  with  the 
Apostle  when  he  wrote  the  second  Epistle  to  the 
Corinthians  (2  Cor.  i.  1). 

It  would  seem  then  that  the  collection  of  the  alms 
was  done  by  duly  accredited  persons  sent  by  the 
Apostle  for  that  purpose.  In  the  case  of  Corinth 
we  see  that  two  of  those  sent  had  already  been  chosen 
by  the  churches  to  carry  the  alms  to  Jerusalem.  But 
we  need  not  suppose  that  only  those  chosen  by  the 
churches  collected  the  ahns,  for  Titus  does  not  seem 
to  have  been  an  aTroVroXo?  eKK\i](ncov  as  were  the  other 
two  brethren  in  2  Cor.  viii.  23. 

3.  The  Condition  of  the  Conveyance  of  the  collection  to 
Jernsaleni.     We   learn   from    1    Cor.  xvi.  3    that    the 


92  THE   EPISTLE    TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

Apostle's  intention  before  he  left  Ephesus  was  to  allow 
the  churches  (for  presumably  his  intention  was  the 
same  for  all)  to  choose  their  own  representatives  to 
carry  their  bounty  to  Jerusalem.  At  that  time  it  was 
uncertain  whether  the  Apostle  would  go  with  them  in 
person.  But  whether  he  went  himself  or  not,  there 
were  to  be  representatives  of  the  churches. 

We  can  see  the  reason  that  prompted  the  Apostle 
to  adopt  this  plan  of  having  chosen  representatives, 
underlying  his  own  words  in  2  Cor.  viii.  20;  where  he 
says  that  he  is  careful  to  avoid  "that  any  man  should 
blame  us  in  the  matter  of  this  bounty  which  is 
ministered  by  us :  for  we  take  thought  for  things 
honourable,  not  only  in  the  sight  of  the  Lord  but 
also  in  the  sight  of  men."  He  would  have  the 
churches  know  and  feel  that  their  bounty  was  minis- 
tered according  to  the  purpose  for  which  it  was  offered. 
There  should  be  no  opportunity  for  suspicion  of  any 
misapplication  of  the  great  offering  of  the  Gentiles  to 
their  Jewish  brethren.^ 

Now  it  is  a  remarkable  fact  that  though  in  the  Acts 
of  the  Apostles  we  have  no  direct  reference  to  this 
great  and  important  SiaKovia,  yet  we  have  an  interesting 
confirmation  of  some  of  the  details  we  have  gleaned 
from  the  three  Epistles  of  the  third  missionary 
journey  in  the  list  of  names  given  in  Acts  xx.  4. 
We  may  reasonably  expect  to  find,  now  that  we 
know   St.    Paul's   desire   that   the    SiaKovla   should  be 

^  For  the  importance  attaching  to  this  ofifering,  see  Romans  xv. 
30-32.  See  Hort  on  this  in  Prolegomena  to  Romans,  pp.  39  ff.  See 
also  an  article  in  The  Expositor,  1893,  by  Mr.  F.  Kendall  on  "The 
Pauline  collection  for  the  Saints." 


LOCALITY  OF  CHURCHES   OF  GAL  ATI  A.     93 

ministered  in  Jerusalem  by  those  chosen  by  the 
churches  who  had  contributed  towards  it,  that  the 
list  of  names  of  those  who  returned  with  him  to 
Jerusalem  will  be  representative  of  these  churches. 
And  our  contention  is  that  such  is  in  fact  the  case. 

It  will  be  well  to  quote  the  passage  in  Acts  xx.4,  5. 
"And  there  accompanied  him  ^  Sopater  of  Beroea,  the 
son  of  Pyrrhus ;  and  of  the  Thessalonians,  Aristarchus 
and  Secundus;  and  Gains  of  Derbe  and  Timothy;  and 
of  Asia,  Tychicus  and  Trophimus.  But  these  came  to 
meet  us  (irpoG-eXOovreg),  and  waited  for  us  at  Troas." 

When  we  examine  this  list  we  find  representatives 
from  Macedonia,  from  Southern  Galatia,  and  from 
Asia,  but  none  from  Achaia.  Now  the  absence  of  any 
names  connected  with  Achaia  is  easily  accounted  for. 
For  St.  Paul  was  himself  returning  from  Greece  via 
Macedonia  (Acts  xx.  2,  3),  and  the  representatives 
from  Achaia  would  naturally  be  with  him.  And  this 
supposition  is  confirmed  by  the  words  of  St.  Luke's 
narrative:  "  And  we  sailed  away  from  Philippi  after 
the  days  of  unleavened  bread,  and  came  unto  them  to 
Troas  in  five  days."  The  pronoun  of  the  first  person 
{}]liLeig)  here  discloses  the  fact  that  St.  Luke,  at  any 
rate,  was  with  St.  Paul.  And  if  it  be  the  case  that  the 
brother,  whose  praise  in  the  gospel  was  spread  through 
all  the  churches,  and  who  was  appointed  by  the 
churches  to  travel  with  the  Apostle  and  others  in 
the  matter  of  the  ministering  to  the  saints,  is  St. 
Luke,  as  tradition  declares  it  is,  we  have  a  perfectly 
clear  explanation  of  why  no  Achaean  representatives 
are    included   in   the   list   of  Acts   xx.    4.       For  this 

^  For  the  omission  of  dxpl  ri]s  'Aalas,  see  W.  H. 


94  THE  EPISTLE    TO    THE  GALATIANS. 

"brother"  had,  as  we  have  seen  from  2  Cor.  viii.,  been 
sent  to  Corinth  with  Titus  and  another  "brother/'  and 
so  naturally  any  representatives  from  Achaia  would 
come  along  with  them.  It  is  not  here  suggested  that 
St.  Luke  represented  Achaia.  On  the  contrary,  it 
would  be  more  reasonable  to  suppose  that  he  repre- 
sented Philippi,  seeing  that  he  was  with  St.  Paul 
on  the  second  missionary  journey,  and  it  was  there  St. 
Paul  left  him,  as  is  clearly  shown  by  the  cessation  of 
the  first  personal  pronoun  in  Acts  xvii.  1. 

It  may  reasonably  be  objected  that  we  have  not 
accounted  for  the  fact  that  Timothy  and  Sopater,  who 
are  among  those  who  waited  at  Troas,  had  been  with 
St.  Paul  at  Corinth  when  he  wrote  his  Epistle  to  the 
Ptomans,  as  we  see  to  be  the  case  from  Eom.  xvi.  21 
(if,  indeed,  we  may  identify  Scoo-iTrarjOo?  of  Eomans 
with  the  llcoTrarpog  ILvppou  Bepoiaiog  of  Acts  xx.  4).^ 
But  I  must  confess  I  see  no  difficulty  in  this  at  all. 
We  learn  from  Acts  xx.  3  that  St.  Paul's  original 
intention  had  been  to  go  from  Achaia  to  Syria,  but 
that  he  altered  his  plans  in  consequence  of  the 
discovery  of  a  plot  against  him  on  the  part  of  the 
Jews.  Someone  then  would  have  to  inform  the 
Asiatic  delegates  of  this  change  of  plan,  and  what 
more  natural  than  that  Timothy  and  others  should  go 
across  to  give  this  information,  and  then  go  on  with 
the  delegates  they  had  informed  to  Troas  to  meet  the 
Apostle  ?      But    there    would    be    still    some    of    the 

^  It  is  not  necessary  to  discuss  whether  this  identity  holds.  It  is 
at  any  rate  true  that  Timothy  was  at  Corinth,  and  yet  afterwards 
he  was  at  Troas  awaiting  the  Apostle. 


LOCALITY  OF  CHURCHES   OF  GALATIA.     95 

delegates  with  St.  Paul,  including,  as  we  think,  those 
from  Achaia;  for  he  would  not,  of  course,  travel  through 
Macedonia  unaccompanied.  That  Aristarchus  and 
Secundus  of  Thessalonica  were  already  at  Troas  does 
not  seem  to  interfere  with  our  theory.  For  when  St. 
Paul  came  through  Macedonia  on  his  way  to  Achaia 
he  did  not  expect  to  return  that  w^ay,  and  he  would 
naturally  arrange  for  the  Macedonian  delegates  who 
were  not  accompanying  him  into  Greece  to  meet  him 
somewhere.  And  it  would  be  quite  natural  for  these 
from  Thessalonica  to  cross  to  Troas  with  the  intention 
of  afterwards  coming  to  Ephesus  (or  Miletus),  where 
St.  Paul  would  have  touched  even  if  he  had  sailed  for 
Syria  from  Cenchreae,  as  he  did  at  the  end  of  his 
second  missionary  journey  (Acts  xviii.  18,  19). 

I  think  there  can  be  little  doubt  that  the  impression 
left  on  the  mind  by  an  ordinary  reader  reading  Acts 
XX.  4,  5,  6  is  that  St.  Paul's  whole  party  consisted  of 
two  detachments.  Those  named  in  verse  4  were 
already  waiting  at  Troas. -^  They  had  gone  to  Troas  to 
be  joined  by  St.  Paul  there,  o-vvelirero  Se  avrw  is 
perfectly  general.  It  seems  to  mean — Here  is  a  list 
of  those  who  accompanied  the  Apostle  or  who  were 
intending  (or  tuere  ready)  to  accompany  him,  for  such 
might  be  the  force  of  the  imperfect.  (Compare  St. 
Luke  i.  59,  eKoXow  avro  CTn  rip  Svonxari  rov  irarpo^ 
avTov  Za^aplav.)      And   then   follow   the   names   with 

^  Professor  Ramsay  (and  also  Mr.  F.  Kendall)  makes  ovtol  of  v.  5 
refer  only  to  Tychicus  and  Trophimus,  but  I  do  not  so  understand 
the  passage.  It  is  not  easy  with  Professor  Ramsay's  reading  of  the 
passage  to  account  for  the  Asiatic  delegates  going  to  Troas  at  all. 
How  did  they  know  they  were  to  go  there  ?  It  could  not  be  part  of 
the  original  plan.     See  St.  Paid  the  Traveller,  etc.,  p.  287. 


96  THE  EPISTLE    TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

an  explanation  that  those  named  were  only  those  who 
had  gone  to  Troas  and  were  there  waiting.  The  other 
detachment  was  with  St  Paul  himself.  No  names 
are  given,  because  St.  Luke  himself  w^as  among  them, 
and  he  never  mentions  his  own  name.  But  seeing 
that  in  verses  2  and  3  he  has  already  explained  that 
St.  Paul  is  coming  from  Greece  {via  Macedonia 
because  of  a  plot  against  him  on  the  part  of  the 
Jews),  we  understand  that  hfJ-eU  need  not  only  mean 
St.  Paul  and  St  Luke,  but  that  it  naturally  includes  all 
representatives  from  Achaia. 

I  have  assumed  that  the  true  text  is  without  o-xf*- 
Tr]9  'Ao-/a9.  I  must  candidly  confess  I  can  make  no 
sense  of  the  passage  if  these  words  are  inserted.  It  is 
fortunate  that  we  know  for  certain  that  Trophimus 
and  Aristarchus,  whose  names  are  in  the  list,  went  to 
Palestine  ;  for  we  can  glean  this  fact  from  Acts  xxi.  29, 
xxvii.  2.  It  seems  then  reasonable  to  conclude  that 
the  list  of  XX.  4  gives  the  names  of  those  who  were  to 
accompany  St.  Paul  to  Jerusalem,  and  not  simply 
^XP^  T>79  'Ao-m?,  for  these  words  find  no  place  in  i^B} 

So  then  we  find  accompanying  the  Apostle  repre- 
sentatives of  the  churches  of  Macedonia,  of  Asia,  of 
Southern  Galatia,  and  (we  think)  of  Achaia  too.  But 
what  about  North  Galatia  ?     From  there  we  have  no 


^  It  will  be  noticed  that  the  reading  -rrpoaekdovTes  makes  excellent 
sense.  For  these  did  not  precede  [TrpoeXdovTes)  St.  Paul  ;  they  came 
to  meet  him  probably  from  Ephesus.  Blass  adopts  the  reading 
TvpoeKdovTes,  and  arbitrarily  remarks  that  irpoaeKdbvTes  of  i^ABE, 
etc.  is  corrupt.  On  the  other  hand,  W.  H.  retain  irpoaeKdbvTes 
in  text. 


LOCALITY   OF  CHURCHES   OF  GALATLA.      97 

representatives.  Yet  the  churches  of  Galatia  were  to 
be  included  in  the  great  SiaKovla.  There  seems  to  me 
only  one  natural  conclusion;  that  is  that  Gains  of 
Derbe  and  Timothy  were  the  representatives  of  the 
churches  of  Galatia,  and  that  those  churches  were  the 
churches  of  Antioch  and  Iconium,  of  Lystra  and 
Derbe. 

Those  who  have  already  made  up  their  minds 
that  the  list  in  Acts  xx.  4  does  not  contain  a  list 
of  the  delegates  of  the  churches  will  be  ready  with 
objections  to  our  contention  that  it  does.  I  can 
foresee  that  it  may  be  objected  that  Timothy  could  not 
be  a  delegate  from  Galatia  because  he  did  not 
come  from  Galatia,  having  been  in  Macedonia  and 
Achaia.  But  it  must  be  clearly  understood  that 
it  is  not  necessary,  in  order  to  his  being  a  representa- 
tive of  Galatia,  that  he  should  just  now  have  come 
from  there.  That  the  churches  of  Galatia  should  have 
chosen  him  to  represent  them  long  ago  when  the 
collection  was  set  on  foot  is  in  itself  not  impossible. 
And  it  is  to  be  noticed  that  it  was  not  necessary  that 
only  delegates  of  the  churches  should  collect  the 
alms.  This  we  have  argued  above.  The  churches 
elected  their  representatives  to  see  the  ministration 
properly  carried  out  at  Jerusalem,  but  not  to  make 
the  collection.  It  may  have  been  a  pure  accident 
that  the  two  brethren  sent  with  Titus  to  Corinth 
to  collect  the  church's  alms  were  also  ciitocttoXoi 
6KK\r](Ti()0v.  They  were  not  at  any  rate  airoa-roXoi 
of  the  church  of  Corinth ;  else  would  not  St.  Paul's 
commendation    of   them  have    been    necessary.       St. 

G 


98  THE  EPISTLE    TO    THE    GALATIANS. 

Paul  does  not  send  them  to  Corinth  for  the  purpose 
of  collecting  because  they  were  airoa-ioXoL  cKKXi^criow, 
but  because  they  were   worthy  of  trust. 

It  will  be  well  to  draw  attention  to  the  fact  that, 
even  if  the  argument  of  this  chapter  be  entirely  over- 
thrown, and  the  South  Galatian  theory  be  deprived 
of  this  piece  of  corroborative  evidence  in  its  favour, 
such  loss  to  the  one  theory  will  be  no  real  gain  to 
the  other.  For  on  no  account  can  Acts  xx.  4  tell  in 
favour  of  the  North  Galatian  theory,  whose  advocates, 
if  they  would  upset  the  other  theory,  must  show 
the  reasoning  of  the  earlier  chapters  of  this  book  to 
be  fallacious. 

The    argument   respecting   the  Destination   of   the 

Epistle  to  the    Galatians   is  now  concluded.     In  the 

next  chapter  the  discussion  of  its  Date  will  be 
begun. 


CHAPTEE   VII. 

ARGUMENTS  FOR  THE  DATE  OF  THE  EPISTLE 
DERIVED    FROM    STATEMENTS    FOUND    THEREIN. 

Haying  so  far  given  reasons  for  agreeing  witii  Professor 
Ramsay's  interpretation  of  the  "  Phrygo-Galatian 
region,"  and  having  given  a  ready  adherence  to  the 
South  Galatian  theory,  the  arguments  for  which,  it 
may  reasonably  be  hoped,  have  been  strengthened  by 
the  analysis  which  has  been  made  of  Acts  xvi.  6, 
the  writer  regrets  that  he  must  now  join  issue  with 
the  Professor,  and  place  himself  in  direct  opposition 
to  him  in  regard  to  the  Date  and  place  of  origin  of 
the  Epistle  to  the  Galatians. 

And  first  it  will  be  well  to  state  clearly  that  the 
acceptance  of  the  South  Galatian  theory  does  not  in 
itself  carry  with  it  acceptance  of  any  particular  theory 
as  to  the  Date  of  the  Epistle.  The  present  writer 
would  indeed  be  in  a  predicament  if,  by  admitting  the 
South  Galatian  theory  to  be  true,  he  were  committed 
to  Professor  Ramsay's  views  as  to  the  Antiochene 
origin  of  the  Epistle.  For  if  he  is  convinced,  as 
he  acknowledges  he  is,  that  the  "  Churches  of  Galatia  " 
were  the  churches  of  Lystra  and   Derbe,  of  Iconium 


100       THE  EPISTLE    TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

and  Antioch,  he  is  none  the  less  convinced  that  the 
Epistle  addressed  to  these  churches  does  not  date  from 
Syrian  Antioch.  He  proposes  in  the  following  pages 
to  give  his  reasons  for  dissenting  from  Professor 
Eamsay,  and  for  agreeing  in  regard  to  this  point  with 
Bishop  Lightfoot. 

The  best  method  of  treatment  of  the  subject  will  be, 
not  to  give  the  two  theories  as  given  by  the  Professor 
and  the  Bishop,  but  to  examine  the  question  in  an 
independent  manner,  making  use  of  their  arguments  as 
occasion  shall  require  and  acknowledging  indebtedness 
to  their  assistance.  The  reader  who  wishes  for  infor- 
mation as  to  their  respective  points  of  view  will  find 
Bishop  Lightfoot's  case  set  forth  in  his  Essay  on 
Tlu  Bate  of  the  Epistle,  in  his  published  Commentary  ; 
and  Professor  Eamsay's  will  be  found  in  his  St.  Paid  the 
Traveller  and  the  Roman  Citizen,  chapter  viii.,  and 
in  several  numbers  of  The  Expositor,  dating  from.  June, 
1898.  This  much  premised,  we  proceed  to  the  subject 
in  hand. 

In  endeavouring  to  determine  the  Date  of  the 
Epistle  to  the  Galatians  we  do  not  so  much  seek 
for  the  figures  of  the  year  in  which  it  was  written 
as  for  its  place  relatively  to  other  Epistles  of  St.  Paul. 
And  the  data  we  have  for  forming  an  opinion  on 
this  point  are  (1)  the  contents  of  the  Epistles,  includ- 
ing of  course  their  style  and  diction,  and  (2)  St.  Luke's 
outline  of  St.  Paul's  missionary  labours  contained  in 
the  Acts  of  the  Apostles.  It  will  be  well  to  insist  at 
once  on  this  point  that  we  have  no  other  sources  from 


DATE  OF  THE  EPISTLE,  101 

which  to  draw.  Even  if  we  make  use  of  the  opinions 
of  other  writers  in  endeavouring  to  form  our  own 
we  must  yet  remember  that  we  have  no  authorities 
other  than  these  two.  The  conclusions  of  critics  and 
historians  and  theologians  are  only  of  value  in  so 
far  as  they  help  us  to  understand  and  make  use  of 
these  authorities.  In  this,  as  in  so  many  other  things, 
the  precept  holds  good  :  iravra  SoKijud'^eTe.  Everyone 
has  a  right  to  an  opinion  who  is  content  to  support  it 
by  an  appeal  to  the  Acts  and  Epistles ;  and  that 
opinion  will  ultimately  prevail  which  takes  proper 
account  of  all  the  data  these  authorities  supply.  This 
is,  of  course,  quite  commonplace,  but  it  is  important  all 
the  same.  The  authority  of  great  names  can  never  be 
a  substitute  for  ultimate  authority. 

We  naturally  turn  first  of  all  to  the  Galatian  Epistle 
itself,  and  inquire  whether  there  is  contained  in  it  any 
mention  of  matters  of  fact,  about  which  we  have  other 
information,  or  from  which  conclusions  can  reasonably 
be  drawn. 

We  have  then  first  the  fact  of  the  Galatian 
apostasy,  described  in  words  which  show  that  it  had 
come  as  a  surprise  to  St.  Paul  (Gal.  i.  6).  Oav.ad'C^co 
OTL  OVTC09  Ta'^e(jo<s  iLLeTaTiOearOe  airo  tov  KuXecravTog 
vjULd9  €1'  -^apiTi  ^pi(TTOu  €is  cTeoov  evayyeXiov,  k.t.\.,  I 
marvel  that  ye  are  so  quickly  removing  from  Him  that 
called  you  in  the  grace  of  Christ  unto  a  different  Gospel. 
"  So  quickly  removing."  Oh  !  then  the  Epistle  must 
have  been  written  soon  after  the  conversion  of  the 
Galatians  and  the  founding  of  the  Galatian  Churches. 


102        THE  EPISTLE   TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

So  we  might  be  inclined  to  assume,  but  this  would  be 
very  hasty  criticism.  "  So  quickly" — so  quickly  after 
what  ?  After  their  conversion  ?  The  Apostle  does 
not  say  so.  The  sudden  defection  of  which  he  com- 
plained, and  at  which  he  marvels,  may  for  anythin^t^  we 
can  tell  have  taken  place  years  after  their  hrst 
acceptance  of  the  Gospel.  Say  these  Galatians  have 
proved  false  to  St.  Paul's  teaching,  and  have  welcomed 
the  Judaisers  in  their  efforts  to  supplant  the  Apostle 
of  the  Gentiles,  and  that  this  has  taken  place  ten  years 
after  their  first  conversion  to  Christ ;  yet,  if  St.  Paul 
had  known  but  a  little  time  before  that  they  were  still 
true  to  what  he  had  taught  them,  however  long  ago  it 
was  since  they  first  believed  it,  and  then  became 
informed  that  they  had  become  false  and  had  welcomed 
the  Judaising  teachers,  might  he  not  say :  "  How 
quickly  ye  are  removing  from  Him  that  called  you  in 
the  grace  of  Christ  unto  a  different  Gospel"? 

Bishop  Lightfoot  says  in  discussing  this  :  "  Here  the 
point  of  time  from  which  he  reckons  is  obviously  the 
time  of  their  conversion,  not  the  time  of  his  second 
visit."  ^  But  it  is  not  at  all  obvious.  If  a  man 
dies  suddenly,  we  need  not  assume  that  he  has  only 
just  been  born  !  We  understand  by  "  sudden  death," 
an  unexpected  death.  And  it  does  not  seem  at  all 
necessary  to  understand  Ta^ew<i  in  any  other  sense 
than  suddenly,  rapidly,  hastily.  ^  Needless  to  say  the 
words  airo  rou  KaXlaavTO^  v/ulu^  k.t.X.  depend  on  the 
verb  imeTaTiOea-Oe,  and  we  must  not  allow  ourselves  to 
suppose  that,  because  there  is  here  spoken  of  a  sudden 
defection   from  Him  that   called  them,  therefore   this 

^  Galatians,  p.  42.  -  Cf.  raxi-vw  airibXeLav  in  2  Pet.  ii.  1. 


DATE   OF    THE   EPISTLE.  103 

defection  takes  place  soon  after  the  call.  There  does 
not  seem  any  necessary  suggestion  of  this  in  St.  Paul's 
words. 

Nor  does  it  seem  that  Lightfoot's  interpretation  of 
oi/Ta)9  rayew^  in  reference  to  the  time  since  the  con- 
version of  the  Galatians  is  calculated  to  improve 
his  own  argument.  He  gets  over  the  difficulty  that 
he  creates  for  himself  by  saying  that  quickness  and 
slowness  are  relative  terras,  and  that  the  rapidity  of 
a  change  is  measured  by  the  importance  of  the  interests 
at  stake.  The  mistake,  so  it  would  seem,  is  caused  by 
his  rendering  of  ovtw^  rayeco^  as  so  soon,  -^  which 
suggests  a  comparison  with  some  other  time,  whereas 
no  such  comparison  is  necessarily  involved  in  rayecog. 

That  rayecog  is  used  with  a  future  reference  as 
equivalent  to  our  English  soon  is  clear  from  such 
passages  as  1  Cor.  iv.  19  {eXevG-ofxai  Se  rayewg  irpog 
v/ULcig),  Phil.  ii.  1 9  (eXTr/^w  Se  ev  'Kvplw  'hjarov  TiinoOeov 
Tayem  ireim^aL  vfJLii/),  Phil.  ii.  24  {ireiroiQa  Se  ev  Kvpico 
oTi  KOI  avTo<i  Tayeo)?  eXevaro/uiai),  2  Tim.  iv.  9  {(jTrovoacrov 
eXOeiu  irpo?  jue  Tayecog).  But  that  there  is  not 
necessarily  inherent  in  the  word  any  comparison 
with  another  point  of  time,  present  or  past,  is  shown 
by  St.  Luke  xiv.  21  {e^eXOe  TayeM<;  eig  rug  irXareia? 
Kol  pujuag  rrjg  iroXecog),  St.  Luke  xvi.  6  (KaOlo-ag  rayeo)^ 
ypdyl/oi'  irevTijKOVTo),  St.  John  xi.  31  {otl  rayecog 
avea-rr]  koi  e^fjXOev),  2  Thess.  ii.  2  (eig  to  ^i]  rayecjog 
a-aXevOtjuai),  and  1  Tim.  v.  22  (x^ipa^  rayecog  ^}]S€v\ 
€7r  LTiOei). 

But    I    cannot   agree   with    Professor   Ramsay  that 

^  Galatians,  p.  42,  with  footnote.     In  his  note  on  i.  6  Lightfoot 
speaks  in  favour  of  the  other  meaning  for  which  we  plead. 


104        THE  EPISTLE    TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

there  is  anything  "  strange "  in  Bishop  Lightfoot's 
understanding  of  oi'to)?  ra^eco?  as  so  soon  after  your 
conrersion}  If  there  is  implied  in  ovrw^  rayem  a 
comparison  with  some  independent  point  of  time,  so 
that  the  words  mean  so  soon  after  something  or  other, 
we  must  allow  that  they  may  mean  soon  after  their 
conversion,  particularly  as  the  context  refers  back  to 
their  first  call  in  the  words  depending  on  jueraTiOea-Oe, 
viz.  airo  rod  KaXecravrog  vjua^  k.t.X.  Moreover,  Light- 
foot's  interpretation  is  the  less  strange  as  he  is  careful 
to  guard  his  meaning  by  saying  that  "the  rapidity  of  a 
change  is  measured  by  the  importance  of  the  interests 
at  stake."  And  he  says :  "  I  cannot  think  it  strange 
that  the  Apostle,  speaking  of  truths  destined  to  outlive 
the  life  of  kingdoms  and  of  nations,  should  complain 
that  his  converts  had  so  soon  deserted  from  the  faith, 
even  though  a  whole  decade  of  years  might  have 
passed  since  they  were  first  brought  to  the  knowledge 
of  Christ."  2 

Professor  Eamsay  himself  interprets  oi/Ta)9  ra^ew? 
to  mean  so  soon  after  St.  FaiiVs  second  visit?  But 
why  ?  Why  not  shortly  after  a  third  visit  ?  There 
is  nothing  in  the  context  certainly  to  suggest  any 
particular  visit.  I  cannot  see  that  the  Professor  has 
given  any  reason  for  reading  after  my  .  .  .  visit  into 
the  words  ovtw^  Ta^em.  In  St.  Paul  the  Traveller, 
a  few  pages  before  he  speaks  of  Lightfoot's  inter- 
pretation of  ovTw^  ra^ew^  as  strange,  he  states  that 
the  Galatian  defection  did  take  place  shortly  after  St. 
Paul's  second  visit,  but  I  cannot  there  find  any  reason 

1  See  St.  Pan!  the  Traveller,  p.  189. 

-  Galatiam,  p.  42.  ^  ^9^^  p^^ii  fj^^  Traveller,  p.  189. 


DATE   OF   THE  EPISTLE.  lOo 

for  it.  He  writes  on  p.  1 8  2  :  "  Soon  after  Paul  left 
the  province  of  Galatia,  there  came  to  it  missionaries 
of  the  Judaising  party,  who  taught  the  Galatian 
Churches  to  take  that  view  of  the  Apostolic  Decree 
which  we  have  described  on  p.  172  f/'  Now,  let  it 
be  observed  that  Professor  Ramsay  states  this  as  a 
matter  of  fact.  He  does  not  even  qualify  his  state- 
ment by  saying  that  this  was  prohably  the  case.  He 
says  it  was  so,  and  he  gives  this  as  the  explanation  of 
something  else  unexplained,  viz.  why  no  mention  is 
made  in  St.  Paul's  letters  of  the  decrees  of  the  Jeru- 
salem Council ! 

The  only  explanation  I  can  find  for  Professor 
Ptamsay's  suggestion  that  ol/'to)?  Ta)(€W9  means  '  so  soon 
after  St.  Paul's  second  visit '  is  that  he  is  convinced 
that  when  the  Epistle  to  the  Galatians  was  written, 
the  Apostle  had  only  visited  the  Galatians  twice.  I 
find  this  stated  by  him  in  The  Church  in  the  Roman 
Empire,  p.  108.  And  doubtless  his  reason  for  this  is 
his  understanding  of  to  irporepov  in  Gal.  iv.  13,  which 
he  talvcs  to  mean  on  the  former  visit,  implying  that 
there  had  been  two  and  only  two  visits. 

But  then  it  is  unfortunate  for  Professor  Pamsay 
that  TO  irporepov  is  capable  of  bearing  another  mean- 
ing. Why  may  it  not  mean,  as  in  St.  John  vi.  62, 
ix.  8,  1  Tim.  i.  13,  simply  formerly^.  Bishop  Light- 
foot,  in  his  note  on  Gal.  iv.  13,  allows  the  possibility 
of  that  meaning  here,  but  doubts  its  probability  on  the 
ground  that  there  seems  to  be  here  no  direct  and 
emphatic  reference  to  some  later  point  of  time. 
Peasons  have  already  been  given  in  the  last  chapter 
but  one  (pp.  73  ff.)  for  dissenting  from  this,  and  it  is 


106        THE  EPISTLE    TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

needless  to  repeat  them  here.  It  is  there  argued  that 
there  is  an  emphatic  contrast  between  formerly  and 
noxD,  though  the  latter  vjovd  does  not  actually  occur  in 
the  passage.      The  context  implies  it. 

It  is  interesting  further  to  notice  that  the  Eevisers 
have  not  thought  it  necessary  to  translate  to  irpoTepov 
on  the  former  occasion,  but  have  in  the  text  given  the 
first  time,  relegating  former  to  the  margin.  This  is 
now  mentioned  not  for  the  purpose  of  defending  it,  for 
it  is  doubtful  whether  it  ought  to  be  defended,  but  in 
order  that  attention  may  be  draw^n  to  the  fact  that  at 
any  rate  the  Eevisers  as  a  body  were  not  convinced 
that  the  words  to  irpoTepov  would  tie  an  interpreter 
down  to  the  sense  of  former,  to  the  exclusion  of  more 
than  two  visits.      This  may,  or  may  not,  be  tenable. 

It  must  be  acknowledged  that  it  is,  to  say  the  least, 
unsatisfactory  to  base  a  whole  argument  on  a  particular 
interpretation  of  a  phrase  which  is  all  the  while  capable 
of  a  different  interpretation.  I  objected  in  the  last 
chapter  but  one  to  the  use  of  to  irpoTepov  as  an 
argument  for  the  North  Galatian  theory,  and  the  objec- 
tion applies  now  to  its  being  used  for  determining  the 
Date  of  the  Epistle.  It  is  to  be  feared  that  the  inter- 
pretation of  TO  irpoTepov  to  mean  on  the  former  visit 
has  affected  the  views  of  both  Bishop  Lightfoot  and 
Professor  Eamsay,  the  one  in  regard  to  the  Locality  of 
the  churches  of  Galatia,  the  other  in  regard  to  its  Date. 
Thus  Bishop  Lightfoot  seeing  (rightly  as  I  think,  and 
as  I  shall  presently  argue)  that  the  Galatian  Epistle 
must  be  placed  after  the  second  to  the  Corinthians 
and  before  the  Epistle  to  the  Eomans,  about  the  date 
of  which  two  Epistles  there  cannot  be  much  reasonable 


DATE   OF   THE  EPISTLE.  107 

doubt,  was  confirmed  in  his  North  Galatian  view  by 
the  fact  that,  as  he  thought,  the  words  to  irporepov 
pointed  to  the  exact  number  of  two  visits  to  the 
Galatians  (not  to  say  Galatia)  before  the  writing  of  the 
Epistle ;  whereas  on  the  South  Galatian  theory  there 
would  be  three  visits.  And  Professor  Ramsay,  already 
assured  that  the  South  Galatian  theory  was  the  correct 
one,  has  now,  partly  to  give  the  words  to  irpoTepov 
the  same  meaning  as  Lightfoot  gave  them,  and  partly 
doubtless  for  other  converging  reasons  which  it  might 
be  hard  to  analyse,  laid  it  down  that  the  Epistle  dates 
from  Antioch.  This  means  that  St.  Paul  wrote  the 
Epistle  before  and  not  during  his  third  missionary 
journey.  For,  of  course,  on  the  South  Galatian  theory, 
after  Ephesus  was  once  reached  on  the  third  journey, 
the  churches  of  Galatia  had  been  visited  three  times 
by  St.  Paul,  the  occasion  of  their  founding  being 
counted  as  one  of  the  three. 

I  do  not  think,  then,  that  we  can  get  any  assistance 
towards  determining  the  Date  of  the  Epistle  from  the 
statements  of  the  Epistle  contained  in  i.  6  and  iv.  13 
on  account  of  the  uncertainty  in  the  meaning  of  ovto)^ 
Ta^ewg  and  to  irpoTepov.  At  the  same  time  the 
sudden  defection  spoken  of  is  a  point  to  be  borne  in 
mind.  It  must  be  used  as  a  check  to  conclusions 
which  may  be  reached  by  other  means.  It  will  be 
reasonable  presently  to  ask  whether  the  Date  we  assign 
to  the  Epistle  on  other  grounds  fits  in  with  the  possi- 
bility of  a  sudden  defection  of  which  St.  Paul  could 
have  had  information.  The  words  to  irpoTepov  seem 
to  me  absolutely  neutral. 


108        THE  EPISTLE   TO    THE  GALATIANS. 

So  far,  then,  we  have  got  no  real  assistance  from 
the  Epistle  for  dating  it.  Nor  can  anything  of  value 
be  had  from  the  allusions  made  by  St.  Paul  in  the 
first  and  second  chapters  to  events  in  his  own  life  and 
Apostolate.  For  the  problem  presented  by  chapter  ii. 
is  in  itself  one  of  extreme  difficulty,  for  there  is  such  a 
decided  difference  of  opinion  as  to  whether  the  visit  to 
Jerusalem  there  spoken  of  is  to  be  identified  with  that 
of  Acts  XV.  or  with  the  earlier  one  of  Acts  xi.  30.^ 
Bishop  Lightfoot  takes  the  former  view.  Professor 
Eamsay  the  latter.  In  view  of  this  difference  of 
opinion,  it  would  be  illogical  to  make  any  use  of 
either  special  interpretation  of  the  chapter  to  deter- 
mine the  Date  of  the  Epistle.  Eor  exactly  this  reason 
in  the  fifth  chapter  we  would  not  allow  any  argument 
derived  from  a  special  identification  of  this  visit,  in 
order  to  decide  the  Locality  of  the  churches  of 
Galatia,  to  have  any  weight.  Any  conclusion  arrived 
at  as  the  result  of  an  acceptance  of  one  of  the 
two  ways  of  looking  at  the  question  would  not 
be  convincing  to  one  who  took  the  opposite  view, 
and  so  the  argument  would  be  nothing  advanced. 
Fortunately  there  are  other  means  of  approxi- 
mating to  the  Date  of  the  Epistle,  nor  does  it 
seem  that  Gal.  ii.  on  either  identification  can 
in  any  way  contribute  towards  its  confirmation  or 
the  contrary,  nor  itself  be  elucidated  by  the  know- 
ledge of  the  time  at  which  the  Epistle  was 
written.  This  visit  to  Jerusalem  remains  a  problem 
by  itself,  and  had  better  be  kept  distinct  from 
other  questions. 

1  This  identification  is  discussed  in  tlie  Appendix. 


DATE   OF   THE   EPISTLE.  109 

We  come  next  to  incidental  expressions  found  in  the 
Epistle.  First  there  are  the  words  in  the  saluta- 
tion at  the  beginning  of  the  Epistle  ol  crvv  e/xol  irdvreg 
aSeXipoi  Here  is  Professor  Eamsay's  comment  on 
these  words  :  "The  phrase,  'all  the  brethren  which  are 
with  me,'  arrests  our  attention.  Paul  wrote  in  some 
place  where  there  was  a  considerable  body  of  Christians  ; 
and  we  may  confidently  say  that  that  implies  one  or 
other  of  the  cities  where  there  were  churches.  The 
words  used  by  Dr.  Zockler  to  describe  the  situation  in 
which  Paul  wrote  are  so  good,  that  we  may  leave  it 
to  him  to  express  what  is  implied  in  this  phrase. 
As  he  has  been  so  prominent  an  adversary  of  the 
South  Galatian  theory,  no  one  will  be  able  to  charge 
me  with  straining  Paul's  words  to  suit  my  own  view." 
Professor  Piamsay  then  quotes  from  Dr.  Zockler  :  "  The 
whole  body  of  fellow- Christians  who  were  with  him 
at  the  time  in  Ephesus^  (not  merely  his  more  pro- 
minent helpers)  are  mentioned  by  St.  Paul  as  those 
who  join  with  him  in  greeting  the  Galatians.  He 
does  this  in  order  to  give  the  more  emphasis  to  what 
he  has  to  say  to  them.  He  writes  indeed  with  his 
own  hand  (vi.  13)  but  in  the  name  of  a  whole  great 
Christianity  community.  The  warnings  and  exhorta- 
tions which  are  to  be  addressed  to  the  Galatians  go 
forth  from  a  body  whose  authority  cannot  be  lightly 
regarded."  ^ 

^  There  is  here  a  footnote  by  Prof.  Ramsay.  "Dr.  Zockler  names 
'  Ephesus'  here,  without  hesitation,  conformably  to  his  theory,  which 
is  the  commonl}'^  received  view  among  North  Galatian  critics."  That 
the  Epistle  dates  from  Ephesus  is  not  the  commonly  received  view 
among  North  Galatian  critics  in  this  country  at  any  rate. 

2  Expositor,  June,  1898. 


110        THE  EPISTLE    TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

Then  after  a  paragraph  in  which  Professor  Eamsay 
sets  forth,  not  without  illustrations  of  his  statement, 
that  in  general  St.  Paul  mentions  in  the  preliminary 
address  of  his  letters  only  "  persons  who  stood  in  some 
close  and  authoritative  relation  to  the  community 
addressed,"  he  goes  on  to  say :  "  The  Church  which 
here  addresses  the  Galatians,  therefore,  is  one  which 
was  closely  connected  with  them,  whose  opinion  would 
carry  weight  among  them,  one  which  could  add  im- 
pressiveness  even  to  a  letter  of  Paul's."  There  are, 
according  to  Professor  Piamsay,  only  two  such  churches  ; 
the  one  is  Jerusalem,  the  other  Antioch.  Jerusalem 
is  out  of  the  question,  therefore  it  was  Antioch,  which 
is  "  from  every  point  of  view  specially  suitable  and 
impressive." 

In  juxtaposition  with  this  assertion  of  Professor 
Ptamsay's  we  may  place  Bishop  Lightfoot's  suggestion 
that  "  the  greeting  from  '  all  the  brethren  which  are 
with  me  '  seems  naturally  to  apply  to  the  little  band 
of  his  fellow-travellers,  and  to  hint  that  the  letter 
was  not  despatched  from  any  of  the  great  churches 
[of  Macedonia  or  Achaia]"^  and,  therefore,  of  course, 
not  from  the  great  Church  of  Antioch. 

We  see,  then,  that  Professor  Eamsay's  interpreta- 
tion of  the  phrase  ol  crvv  eu.o\  irdvTeg  aSeXcpoi  is  the 
direct  contrary  of  that  given  by  Bishop  Lightfoot.  And 
it  is  reasonable  to  suppose  that  Professor  Eamsay  had 
read  Lightfoot's  reasons  for  interpreting  ol  arvv  ejnoL 
as  he  does.  Yet  we  find  no  answer  to  these,  but 
only  a  counter  statement.  Professor  Eamsay's  reason- 
ing, if  reasoning  it  can  be  called,  is  purely  a  priori  ; 

^  Galatians,  p.  55. 


DATE    OF   THE   EPISTLE.  \\\ 

Lightfoot's  is,  on  the  contrary, deductive.  For  he  has  been 
careful  to  point  out  that  in  the  only  other  place  in  St. 
Paul's  Epistles  in  which  the  phrase  ol  (tvv  e/mo]  aSeXcpoi 
occurs,  namely  Philippians  iv.  21,  "the  brethren  who 
are  with  him  "  are  mentioned  separately  and  as  dis- 
tinguished from  the  Christians  in  Rome  whence  he  was 
writing.  Thus  we  have  aa-Trdi^ovTai  viuLa<?  ol  <jvv  ejuLo] 
aSeXcbol.  aariraXpvTaL  vjULa<^  Trai^re?  ol  clyioi,  jmaXiarTa  oe 
ol  €K  T^?  Ka/o-a^o?  oiKLa<i  (Phil.  iv.  21,  22).  Says 
Lightfoot  (note  on  Phil.  iv.  21):  "Apparently  the 
Apostle's  personal  companions  and  fellow  travellers 
are  meant,  as  distinguished  from  the  Christians 
resident  in  Eome  who  are  described  in  the  following 
verse." 

But  if  Professor  Ramsay  contends  that  in  the  saluta- 
tion of  Galatians  the  word  all  in  some  way  alters  the 
meaning  of  the  phrase  ol  crvv  ejmo]  aSeXcpoi,  we  should 
certainly  question  his  right  so  to  do,  for  the  very 
position  of  Tra^re?  in  St.  Paul's  phrase  is  against  such 
a  contention.  The  order  of  the  words  is  :  Those  vjith 
me  all  brethren  ;  that  is,  my  companions  all  of  them 
'brethren. 

It  is  only  fair  to  Professor  Ramsay  to  say  that  the 
paragraph  in  which  he  contends  that  in  general  St. 
Paul  mentions  in  the  preliminary  address  of  his 
letters  "  only  persons  who  stood  in  some  close  and 
authoritative  relation  to  the  community  addressed  "  is 
based  on  deductive  reasoning;;  for  he  illustrates  his 
point  by  reference  to  the  salutation  of  1  Corinthians, 
in  which  Sosthenes  is  mentio-ned  by  name ;  2  Corin- 
thians,   Colossians,    and    Philemon,  where   Timothy  is 


112        THE  EPISTLE    TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

mentioned ;  and  the  two  Epistles  to  the  Thessalonians, 
where  Silvanus  and  Timothy  join  in  addressing  the 
Thessalonians.  But  it  may  reasonably  be  questioned 
whether  in  any  one  of  these  cases  the  mention  of 
another  is  meant  to  add  iveight  to  St.  Paul's  words. 
And,  certainly,  to  take  the  special  case  of  the  Epistle 
to  the  Galatians,  it  is  a  straining  of  the  whole  argu- 
ment of  the  Epistle  to  say  that  in  any  way  the 
Apostle  makes  use  of  any  authority  but  his  own. 
The  whole  Epistle  points  exactly  the  other  way.  Take 
such  an  expression  as  that  in  the  second  verse  of  the 
fifth  chapter,  BeJiold  I  Paul  say  unto  you  that  if  ye  receive 
circumcision,  Christ  iviU  profit  you  nothing.  He  says 
eyui  Jlav\o<s,  not  eym  Hai/Xo?  kul  ol  (tvv  e/ulo]  iravTe^ 
aSeXipoL  I,  Paul,  on  my  authority,  not  "  I,  Paul, 
backed  by  the  church  in  Antioch." 

Bishop  Lightfoot,  on  the  contrary,  rightly  saw  that 
the  view  of  patristic  writers  and  modern  commentators, 
who  found  in  the  expression  oc  crvv  ejuloI  TraVre?  aSeXcpoL 
a  desire  on  the  part  of  the  Apostle  to  fortify  his 
teaching  by  the  sanction  of  others,  would  not  hold. 
"  The  Apostle,  in  fact,  dismisses  the  mention  of  his 
companions  as  rapidly  as  possible  in  one  general 
expression."^ 

When,  then.  Professor  Piamsay  says  that  we  may  "con- 
fidently" argue  that  the  phrase  olavv  e/xo)  irdvreg  aSe\<poL 
implies  one  or  other  of  the  cities  where  there  were 
churches,  we  reply  that  we  have  no  such  confidence, 
and  that  those  intended  by  the  phrase  were  more  likely 
St.  Paul's  "  companions  in  travel."  If  St.  Paul  wrote 
from  one  of  the  great  churches  he  did  not  certainly 
1  Galatians,  note  on  i.  2,  p.  73. 


DATE   OF   THE  EPISTLE.  II3 

fortify  his  position  by  the  authority  of  such.      He  did 
not  even  send  the  church's  greetings. 

We  have  next  to  consider  the  use  made  by  Professor 
Ramsay  of  the  manner  in  which  Titus  is  mentioned  in 
the  Epistle  (see  Gal.  ii.),  as  he  employs  this  also  to 
date  the  Epistle  from  Antioch.  Here  are  the  Professor's 
words  quoted  from  the  Exioositor,  June,  1898:  "  Titus 
was  evidently  unknown  to  the  Galatians.  The  point 
of  Paul's  reference  to  him  turns  on  his  nationality. 
He  is  a  Greek,  and  this  is  carefully  explained  in  ii.  3, 
so  that  the  readers  may  not  fail  to  catch  the  drift  of 
the  argument.  Had  the  Galatians  known  Titus,  had  he 
accompanied  Paul  on  a  journey  and  been  familiar  to 
them,  the  explanation  would  have  been  unnecessary;  and 
in  this  Epistle  there  is  not  a  single  unnecessary  word." 

It  is  really  interesting,  not  to  say  amusing,  to  place 
by  the  side  of  this  opinion  of  Professor  Eamsay's  that 
of  Dean  Howson,  as  given  in  the  article  on  Titus  in 
Smith's  Dictionary  of  the  Bible:  "It  is  to  oar  purpose  to 
remark  that,  in  the  passage  cited  above  [that  is,  mark, 
the  very  same  passage  from  which  Professor  liamsay 
has  drawn  his  conclusion],  Titus  is  so  mentioned  as 
apparently  to  imply  that  he  had  become  personally 
known  to  the  Galatian  Christians." 

Thus  the  two  conclusions  drawn  from  the  same 
passage  of  the  Epistle  are  directly  contrary  the  one 
to  the  other.  It  will  be  w^ell  then  to  examine  what 
St.  Paul  really  did  write  about  Titus,  that  we  may 
form  some  conclusion   of  our   own. 

The  first  mention  of  Titus  in  the  Galatian  Epistle 

H 


114        THE  EPISTLE    TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

is  in  these  words :  "  Then  after  the  space  of  fourteen 
years  I  went  up  again  to  Jerusalem  with  Barnabas, 
taking  Titus  also  with  me"  (Gal.  ii.  1).  Now  I  do  not 
think  there  can  be  any  difference  of  opinion  in  regard 
to  this ;  that  if  this  had  been  the  only  mention  of 
Titus  in  the  Epistle,  we  should  have  been  justified  in 
concludincj  that  he  was  known  to  those  to  whom  the 
Epistle  was  addressed ;  if  not  personally  known,  at 
any  rate  known  by  name.  But  this  is  not  the  only 
place  where  Titus  is  mentioned.  The  next  time  his 
name  occurs,  only  two  verses  further  on,  we  have  an 
explanatory  clause  respecting  him.  This  verse  is 
rendered  in  the  Eevised  Version :  "  But  not  even 
Titus,  who  was  with  me,  being  a  Greek,  was  compelled 
to  be  circumcised."  St.  Paul's  own  words  are,  according 
to  this,  oKK  ovSe  T/to?  o  otvp  ejuLOi/'EiWrjv  cov,  rjvayKacrOt] 
Tre  pLTjutjOtjvai. 

But  these  words  are  capable  of  a  different  interpre- 
tation. We  are  not  bound  to  put  a  comma  after 
e/uLoi  What  St.  Paul  meant  may  have  been  aXX'  ovSe 
TltoS  6  (Tvv  ejULol  "EXX^p'  cov  rjvayKaarOi]  irepLTjULtjOfji/ai. 
So  Bishop  Lightfoot  reads  the  passage,  and  this  has 
much  to  recommend  it.  Clearly,  then,  this  verse 
requires  some  further  considering. 

What  is  the  connection  of  "EXX^yj/  coi>  with  the  rest 
of  the  sentence  ?      That  is  the  real  question. 

First,  we  may  punctuate  as  Westcott  and  Hort  have 
done,  that  is  we  may  supply  a  comma  both  before  and 
after  "EXX^yj/  cop.  In  this  case  the  words  "EXX^j/  6w 
would  give  the  reason  why  Titus  was  not  circumcised. 
He    was    not    circumcised    because   he  was    a    Gentile. 


DATE   OF   THE   EPISTLE.  115 

This,  as  I  understand  it,  would  mean  tliat  Titus  was 
wholly  Gentile,  not,  like  Timothy,  of  mixed  Jewish  and 
Gentile  parentage.  As  Lightfoot  says  in  his  note  on 
this  verse :  "  There  seems  to  be  a  tacit  allusion  to 
the  case  of  Timothy.  '  You  maintain,'  St.  Paul  seems 
to  argue,  '  that  I  allowed  the  validity  of  the  Mosaic  law 
in  circumcising  Timothy  (Acts  xvi.  1-3).  But  Timothy 
was  half  of  Jewish  parentage.  How  did  I  act  in  the 
case  of  Titus,  a  true  Gentile  ?  I  did  not  yield  for  a 
moment.'  " 

Now  let  us  ask  :  Is  there  any  necessary  implication 
here  that  Titus  was  unknown  to  the  Galatians?  For 
my  own  part  I  cannot  see  that  there  is.  For  supposing 
Titus  to  have  already  visited  the  churches  of  Galatia 
along  with  St.  Paul,  must  w^e  necessarily  suppose  that 
the  Apostle  had  given  it  out  everywhere  he  took  Titus 
that  he  was  a  Gentile  ?  Was  it  necessary  or  even 
likely?  Or  even  if  those  to  whom  the  Epistle  to  the 
Galatians  was  addressed  knew  that  Titus  was  a  Gentile, 
would  that  make  it  impossible  for  St.  Paul  to  insert 
these  words,  "YXkv]v  lov  ?  The  words  might  mean  no 
more  than  "  because  he  was,  as  you  know,  a  Gentile." 
We  have  certainly  no  right  to  read  into  them  what 
Professor  Kamsay  asks  us  to  understand,  "  because  he 
was,  as  you  do  not  know,  and  as  I  want  to  inform  you, 
a  Gentile." 

But  we  must  inquire  whether  the  interpretation 
of  "^\\f]v  wv  given  above  is  the  right  one.  "  But 
not  even  Titus,  who  was  with  me,  was  compelled  to 
be  circumcised,  and  that  because  he  was  a  Gentile,"  is 
the  sense  of  the  verse.  Well,  then,  we  ask  what  is  the 
force  of  not  even  ?      We  could  understand  that  St.  Paul 


116        THE  EPISTLE    TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

might  write :  "  But  Titus,  who  was  with  me,  was  not 
compelled  to  be  circumcised,  because  he  was  wholly 
Gentile  by  parentage."  But  we  have  to  explain  why 
he  said  not  even  Titus.  I  venture  to  think  that  the 
ov^e  can  only  be  explained  satisfactorily  by  the 
following  words :  o  avv  ejuLol.  Not  even  Titus,  though 
he  was  my  comjjcinion,  locts  compelled  to  he  circumcised} 
For  let  it  be  noticed  that  6  o-vv  ejuol  must  not  be 
understood  as  meaning  only  "  who  happened  to  be 
with  me."  St.  Paul  has  already  said  that  Titus  was 
with  him  in  writing  awirapaXa^wv  koi  Tltop.  Titus 
was  more  than  ivith  the  Apostle.  He  was  his 
attendant.  It  might  seem,  then,  that  Titus  ought  to 
have  been  circumcised  as  Timothy  had  been.  For  we 
read  in  Acts  xvi.  3 :  "  Him  would  Paul  have  to  go 
forth  with  him  (ctvv  avru)  e^eXOeip)]  and  he  took  and 
circumcised  him  because  of  the  Jews  that  were  in 
those  parts ;  for  they  all  knew  that  his  father  was  a 
Greek.""  "  But,"  St.  Paul  is  thought  to  say,  "the  cases 
were  different.  Titus  was  my  companion,  it  is  true, 
but  he  was  entirely  of  Gentile  extraction,  so  though 
he  was  my  companion  yet  because  he  was  a  Gentile, 

^  1  cannot  but  think  that  the  intended  meaning  of  the  unfinished 
sentence  of  v.  4  was  that  "  because  of  false  brethren,  etc.,  .  .  . 
an  effort  was  made  to  make  me  concede  the  point  of  Titus'  circum- 
cision." But  no,  "  though  Titus  was  in  close  attendance  upon  me  I 
would  not  yield  the  point. "  The  sentence  of  verse  4  remains  un- 
finished because  the  very  word  xl/€v8a8e\(pov$  gives  a  reason  for 
refusal. 

-  It  is  not  likely  then,  as  I  said  above,  that  had  Titus  not  been 
known  to  be  a  Gentile  when  visiting  the  Galatian  churches.  St.  Paul 
would  have  thought  it  well  to  make  the  fact  known.  He  only 
circumcised  Timothy  because  they  hieiv  that  he  was  partly  of  Gentile 
parentage.  The  words  imply  that  he  would  not  have  thought  it 
necessary  to  tell  them  if  they  had  not  known.  Indeed,  he  would 
not  have  circumcised  Timothy. 


DATE   OF   THE  EPISTLE.  \yj 

without  admixture  of  Jewish  blood,  I  would  not  have 
him  circumcised  in  spite  of  all  efforts  to  prove  me 
wrong." 

But  now  let  us  look  at  the  passage  otherwise 
punctuated.  Let  us  read  aXK  ovSe  T/ro?  o  crvv  ejuol 
'EWtjv  cov  }]uayKdcrOtj  irepLTinriO^vaL.  We  now  connect 
the  words  ''EXX>/i/  lov  more  with  o  crvv  ejuol  than  with 
}}vayKdcr6}].  "But  not  even  Titus,  who  was  accom- 
panying me  as  a  Gentile,  was  compelled  to  be 
circumcised."  This  rendering  makes  perfectly  good 
sense  of  the  passage,  and,  exactly  because  it  saves  the 
jarring  transition  from  thonr/h  he  was  my  companion  to 
Iccause  he  was  a  Gentile,  I  think  it  is  greatly  to  be 
preferred  to  the  one  we  have  considered  above. 
Luther,  in  his  translation  has  coupled  "EXX;/!/  wv 
closely  with  6  avv  e^ol,  but  he  has  given  to  the  participle 
tou  a  concessional  force.  "  Aber  es  ward  auch  Titus 
nicht  gezwungen  sich  zu  beschneiden,  der  mit  mir 
war,  ob  er  wohl  ein  Grieche  war."  There  is  really 
not  much  difference  in  the  ultimate  meaning  of  the 
passage  whether  we  take  ''EXX//i/  cop  to  mean  ccs  a 
Gentile  (being  a  Gentile)  or  though  he  luerc  a  Gentile. 
The  point  is  that  Titus  was  with  St.  Paul,  and  he 
was  known  to  be  his  companion,  and  known  also 
to  be  a  Gentile  (or,  as  Luther  puts  it,  he  was  his 
companion  though  he  was  a  Gentile).  The  sense  of 
the  verse  now  is:  "Not  even  Titus,  though  he  was  my 
companion,  and  though  he  was  a  Gentile,  and  known 
to  be  such,  was  compelled  to  be  circumcised." 

If  this  be  the  meaning  of  the  passage,  and  we  think 
it  is,  the  conclusion  cannot   be  drawn   that  Titus  was 


118        THE  EPISTLE    TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

unknown  personally  to  the  churches  of  Galatia.  So 
far  from  this  being  the  case,  the  manner  of  his 
introduction  in  the  words  a-vi/TrapaXaPwv  Kai  Tltov, 
without  further  immediate  explanation,  would  suggest 
that  he  was  known. 

But  it  would  be  better  not  to  assume,  in  determining 
the  Date  of  the  Epistle,  either  that  Titus  was  known  or 
that  he  was  unknown.  But  I  expect  to  find  when 
we  have  come  at  the  Date  in  some  other  way  that 
Titus  had  already  been  witli  St.  Paul  in  the  churches 
of  Galatia  when  the  Epistle  was  written. 

I  think  it  will  be  seen  from  the  above  reasoning 
that  it  is  impossible  to  determine  satisfactorily  the 
Date  of  the  Galatian  Epistle  from  its  own  statements. 
In  the  next  Chapter  we  must  approach  the  question 
from  another  point  of  view. 


CHAPTER    VIIT. 

AEGUMENTS    FOR   THE    DATE    OF   THE   EPISTLE 

DERIVED  FROM  A  COMPARISON  OF  IT  WITH 

OTHER  EPISTLES  OF  KNOWN   DATE. 

In  the  preceding  chapter  we  have  seen  how  hopeless 
it  is  to  try  to  determine  the  Date  of  the  Epistle  to 
the  Galatians  by  any  special  interpretation  of  such 
ambiguous  phrases  in  it  as  ourcog  Tayewg,  to  irporepov, 
"EWrjv  cov,  such  expressions  as  these  being  capable 
of  bearing  different  meanings,  and  there  being  no 
consensus  of  opinion  as  to  which  meaning  ought  to  be 
adopted.  Further,  we  have  no  information  from  the 
Epistle  as  to  who  were  St.  Paul's  companions  when 
he  wrote.  Not  one  single  greeting  from  any  person 
whose  name  is  mentioned  occurs  in  the  Epistle  whether 
at  its  beginning  or  at  the  close.  The  phrase  ol  crvv 
efxo\  Trrij/re?  aSeXcpoi  in  the  opening  address  is  too 
vague  and  indeterminate  to  be  of  much  use.  We 
have  decided  that  the  phrase  certainly  does  not  justify 
us  in  dating  the  Epistle  from  any  great  church,  or 
Christian  centre,  but  neither  does  it  in  itself  necessarily 
preclude  the  possibility  that  it  was  written  from 
some  such   centre.     From   the  Epistle  itself  and   by 


120        THE  EPISTLE    TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

itself  we  can  determine  nothing  certainly,  and  it  will 
be  better  to  try  and  approach  the  problem  of  the 
Date  in  some  other  way.  If  a  solution  can  be  found, 
then  let  such  phrases  as  oi/rw?  rayeocxi,  to  irporepov  and 
ol  <jvv  ejuoi  iravreg  aSeXipoi  receive  their  interpretation 
accordingly.  And  then  let  us  see  if  we  have  a 
consistent  whole.  We  shall  then  have  no  circular 
argument,  and  our  conclusions  are  more  likely  to  win 
acceptance. 

What  other  way  then  have  we  by  which  we  may 
hope  to  decide  when  the  Epistle  was  written  ?  Our 
immediate  answer  is  :  A  comparison  of  the  Ejjistle  with 
the  other  Epistles  with  which  it  will  hear  comparison. 
Thus,  no  one  will  deny  the  marked  similarity  in  doc- 
trinal statement  between  the  Epistle  to  the  Eomans 
and  that  to  the  Galatians.  This  marked  similarity 
of  doctrinal  statement  extends  further  to  actual  uni- 
formity of  expressions,  which  any  one  can  verify  for 
himself.  If  any  one  will  place  side  by  side  parallel 
passages,  as  Bishop  Lightfoot  has  done  in  his  argument 
on  the  date  of  the  Galatian  Epistle,-^  he  will  not  be 
likely  to  disagree  with  the  Bishop's  conclusion  :  "  It 
will  be  unnecessary  to  add  many  words  on  a  similarity 
so  great  as  these  passages  exhibit.  Observe  only  that 
it  is  manifold  and  various.  Sometimes  it  is  found  in 
a  train  of  argument  more  or  less  extended,  and  certainly 
not  obvious :  sometimes  in  close  verbal  coincidences, 
where  the  language  and  thoughts  are  unusual,  or  where 
a  quotation  is  freely  given,  and  where  the  coincidence 
therefore  was  less  to  be  expected:  sometimes  in  the 
same   application   of  a   text,   and   the   same   comment 

^  Galatians,  p.  45, 


DATE    OF    THE   EPISTLE.  121 

upon  it,  where  that  application  and  comment  have  no 
obvious  reference  to  the  main  subject  of  discussion."  ^ 

Now,  this  similarity  has  to  be  accounted  for.  In 
what  ways  can  this  be  done  ?  We  might  say  first  of  all 
that  it  is  possible  that  the  two  Epistles  were  written 
almost  at  the  same  time  (w&  need  not  at  present 
discuss  which  of  the  two  is  likely  to  be  the  earlier),  and 
we  should  have,  to  support  us  in  such  a  supposition, 
the  fact  that  two  other  Pauline  Epistles — those  to 
the  Ephesians  and  Colossians  respectively,  which  also 
exhibit  strong  similarity  of  doctrinal  teaching  and 
expression — were  to  our  certain  knowledge  written 
about  the  same  time,  and  were  despatched  by  the 
same  messenger.^  It  would  be  most  reasonable  then 
to  try  such  a  hypothesis  first  of  all,  and  see  whereto  it 
would  lead  us,  and  whether  it  would  prove  consistent 
with  known  facts,  or  whether  it  was  in  conflict  with 
statements  made  in  the  Galatian  Epistle.  If  we  failed 
to  get  a  consistent  theory  in  this  way,  we  should  have 
to  think  what  other  explanations  could  be  given  of  the 
striking  similarity  between  the  Epistle  to  the  Eomans 
and  that  to  the  Galatians.  Will  any  hold  that  the  two 
Epistles  need  not  have  been  composed  at  times  sepa- 
rated by  only  a  short  interval  ?  Then  they  must 
account  for  the  same  teaching  in  both  ;  and  not  only 
for  that,  but  also  for  the  marked  similarity  in  expression 
and  argumentative  detail.  Do  any  say  "  St.  Paul  was 
an  inspired  man,  and  so  the  same  argument  expressed 
in  nearly  the  same  words  might  be  revealed  to  him  at 
different  times  in  his  ministry  "  ?  If  any  argue  so, 
we  part  company  with  them.     Such  supernatural  inter- 

1  Galatians,  p.  48.       '^  Compare  Eph.  vi.  21,  22,  with  Col.  iv.  7-9. 


122        THE  EPISTLE    TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

vention  must  not  be  allowed  if  a  natural  explanation 
can  be  given.  We  do  not  deny  St.  Paul's  inspiration 
(we  have  not  studied  his  writings  with  that  result), 
but  we  have  a  higher  view  of  it  than  to  think  that 
it  was  anything  so  mechanical  as  this. 

But  some  seem  to  think  that  the  similarity  between 
the  two  Epistles  is  quite  possible  on  natural  grounds, 
even  though  the  interval  between  them  were  a  fairly 
long  one.  This  might  be  so  if  we  had  any  reason 
to  suppose  that  St.  Paul  kept  a  copy  of  his  letters  and 
made  use  of  what  he  had  written  before  to  compose 
again.  But  we  venture  to  think  that  this  is  extremely 
unlikely,  though  we  acknowledge  that  it  is  not  beyond 
the  bounds  of  possibility,  nor  is  it  "  supernatural." 
We  only  say  that  we  have  no  evidence  of  it.  The 
only  thing  approaching  evidence  would  be  such  an 
argument  as  that  of  Bishop  Lightfoot  on  the  generali- 
sation of  the  Epistle  to  the  Eomans,  whereby  that 
Epistle  was  made  to  serve  as  a  statement  of  doctrine 
for  general  use  as  well  as  for  the  Christians  in  Eome.^ 
But  this  is  by  no  means  proved,  if  it  be  not  dis- 
proved. 

Let  us  take  for  a  moment  Professor  Eamsay's  theory 
that  the  Epistle  to  the  Galatians  was  written  from 
Syrian  Antioch  before  St.  Paul  started  on  his  third 
missionary  journey.  Now,  let  it  be  remembered  that 
there  has  to  be  inserted  between  the  writing  of  this 
letter  and  the  Epistle  to  the  Eomans,  which  we  know 
to  have  been  written  at  the  end  of  the  third  missionary 

^Biblical  Essays,  "The  Structure  and  Destination  of  the  Epistle 
to  the  Romans," 


DATE   OF   THE   EPISTLE.  123 

journey/  three  years  at  Ephesus,  to  say  nothing  of  the 
time  spent  in  getting  there,  and  in  going  from 
Ephesus  through  Macedonia  to  Corinth.  And  further, 
it  must  be  remembered  that  during  this  long  interval 
of  time  in  St.  Paul's  case,  he  has  had  much  on  his  mind. 
Anxiety  about  the  churches,  disloyalty  of  his  converts — 
these  we  know,  from  the  Corinthian  Epistles,  to  have 
been  his  lot.  It  is  most  unlikely  then  that  so  long  an 
interval  of  time,  in  which  so  much  has  been  done  and 
thought  about,  should  have  elapsed  between  the  two 
Epistles.'-''  We  do  not  say  it  is  absolutely  impossible, 
only  that  it  is  extremely  unlikely,  and  it  would  require 
very  strong  evidence  of  another  kind  to  convince 
us  of  it. 

Or  again,  take  the  theory  widely  held  in  Germany 
at  one  time,  that  the  Epistle  was  written  from  Ephesus 
at  an  early  stage  of  St.  Paul's  three  years'  stay  there. 
Well,  this  is  possible,  in  the  same  way  as  Professor 
Ptamsay's  theory  is  possible,  but  there  is  very  little  to 
choose  between  the  a  priori  likelihood  of  the  one 
and  of  the  other. 

The  simj^lest  and  most  natuial  explanation  of  the 
strong  similarity  of  style  and  diction  between  the 
Epistles  to  Rome  and  the  churches  of  Galatia  respec- 
tively, is  that  the  interval  of  time  between  their 
composition  was  very  short.  Such  a  hypothesis  must 
take  precedence  of  all  others,  until  it  is  shown  to  be 

^  See  chapter  vi.  of  this  essay. 

2  It  does  not  seem  to  me  that  Mr.  F.  Rendall's  words  {Expositor, 
1894,  The  Galafian-s  of  St.  Paul  and  the  Date  of  the  Ejihtle),  suppos- 
ing them  to  be  true,  find  an  application  in  this  particular  case. 
*'  A  man  may  well  repeat  the  same  thoughts  and  the  same  expressions 
at  considerable  intervals,  if  the  intervening  tenor  of  his  life  and  his 
environment  continue  constant," 


^ 


124        THE  EPISTLE    TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

impossible    or    at    least    unlikely    on    other    grounds. 
This,  then,  shall  be  our  hypothesis  from  this  point. 

Assuming,  as  we  now  do,  that  the  Galatian  Epistle 
is  separated  from  that  to  Eome  by  only  a  short  interval, 
we  have  next  to  ask  which  Epistle  ought  to  take  the 
precedence  in  point  of  time.  On  this  point  Bishop 
Lightfoot  says  :  "  There  can  be  no  reasonable  doubt 
which  of  the  two  Epistles  contains  the  earlier  expression 
of  the  thoughts  common  to  both.  The  Epistle  to  the 
Galatians  stands  in  relation  to  the  Koman  letter,  as 
t/  the  rough  model  to  the  finished  statue ;  or  rather,  if  I 
may  press  the  metaphor  without  misapprehension,  it  is 
the  first  study  of  a  single  figure,  which  is  worked  into  a 
group  in  the  latter  writing.  To  the  Galatians  the 
Apostle  flashes  out  in  indignant  remonstrance  the  first 
eager  thoughts  kindled  by  his  zeal  for  the  Gospel 
striking  suddenly  against  a  stubborn  form  of  Judaism. 
To  the  Komans  he  writes  at  leisure,  under  no  pressure 
of  circumstances,  in  the  face  of  no  direct  antagonism 
explaining,  completing,  extending  the  teaching  of  the 
earlier  letter  by  giving  it  a  double  edge  directed  against 
Jew  and  Gentile  alike.  The  matter,  which  in  the  one 
Epistle  is  personal  and  fragmentary,  elicited  by  the 
special  needs  of  an  individual  church,  is  in  the  other 
generalised  and  arranged  so  as  to  form  a  compre- 
hensive and  systematic  treatise.  Very  few  critics  of 
name  have  assigned  a  priority  of  date  to  the  Eoman 
Epistle."^ 

It  is  only  fair  here  to  say,  in  reference  to  this  last 
sentence,  that   Dr.  Clemen  has  in   his  Chroiiologie  der 

^  Galatians  p.  49. 


DATE   OF   THE  EPISTLE.  125 

paulinischen  Briefe  come  to  the  conclusion  that  Gala- 
tians  is  later  than  Eomans.  But  Dr.  Clemen's  view  is 
only  part  of  a  general  upset  (of  his  making)  of  the 
whole  chronology  of  St.  Paul's  life,  so  that  it  does  not 
seem  to  me  at  all  likely.^  Dr.  Sanday  and  Mr.  Headlam 
remark  :  "  There  is  much  that  is  arbitrary  in  the  whole 
of  this  reconstruction,  and  the  common  view  seems  to 
us  far  more  probable  that  the  Epistle  to  the  Eomans 
marks  rather  the  gradual  subsidence  of  troubled  waters 
than  their  first  disturbing." 

We  seem,  then,  to  have  a  fairly  general  agreement 
among  English  scholars  that  the  Galatian  Epistle  is 
the  earlier  of  the  two  ;  and  the  theory  that  the  Epistle 
to  the  Galatians  is  a  recension  of  the  Eoman  Epistle 
adapted  to  a  particular  set  of  churches  does  not  find 
support.  It  is  satisfactory  that  Professor  Eamsay  dates 
Eomans  after  Galatians. 

We  shall,  then,  put  the  Galatian  Epistle  a  little 
before  that  to  the  Eomans  ;  and  then  we  have  to  face 
the  fact  that  the  Epistle  to  the  Galatians  must  have 
been  written  about  the  same  time  also  as  the  Second 
Epistle  to  the  Corinthians,^  and  a  certain  similarity  with 
this  Epistle  may  be  expected.  And  similarity  there 
is — a  similarity,  as  Lightfoot  says,  "  consisting  not  so 
much  in  words  and  arguments  as  in  tone  and  feeling." 
And  he  quotes  Jowett's  "just  and  appreciative  criticism": 
"  In  both  there  is  the  same  sensitiveness  in  the  Apostle 
to  the  behaviour  of  his  converts  to  himself,  the   same 

^  I  have  not  gone  into  Dr.  Clemen's  arguments.  I  have  seen  his 
book,  but  have  made  no  study  of  it. 


See  argument  of  chapter  vi.  above. 


126        THE  EPISTLE   TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

earnestness  about  the  points  of  difference,  the  same 
remembrance  of  his  '  infirmity '  while  he  was  yet  with 
them,  the  same  consciousness  of  the  precarious  basis  on 
which  his  own  authority  rested  in  the  existing  state  of 
the  two  churches.  In  both  there  is  a  greater  display 
of  his  own  feelings  than  in  any  other  portion  of  his 
writings,  a  deeper  contrast  of  inward  exaltation  and 
outward  suffering,  more  of  personal  entreaty,  a  greater 
readiness  to  impart  himself."  And  Bishop  Lightfoot 
adds  :  "  If  it  were  necessary  to  add  anything  to  this  just 
and  appreciative  criticism,  the  Apostle's  tone  in  dealing 
with  his  antagonists  would  supply  an  instructive  field 
for  comparison.  Both  Epistles  exhibit  the  same  com- 
bination of  protest  and  concession  in  combating  the 
exclusive  rights  claimed  for  the  elder  Apostles,  the 
same  vehement  condemnation  of  the  false  teachers 
guarded  by  the  same  careful  suppression  of  names,  the 
same  strong  assertion  of  his  Apostolic  office  tempered 
with  the  same  depreciation  of  his  own  personal 
merits."-^ 

The  whole  of  Bishop  Lightfoot's  reasoning  respecting 
the  relative  dates  of  these  four  Epistles  of  the  third 
missionary  journey,  which  he  thus  arranges :  1  Corin- 
thians, 2  Corinthians,  Galatians,  Romans,  seems  so 
powerful  that  it  is  difficult  to  understand  how  it  can 
fail  to  carry  conviction. 

We  will  assume  the  order  which  he  has  by  his  well 
arranged  arguments  decided,  and  turn  to  investigate 
the  consistency  of  this  dating  with  the  Galatian  Epistle 

1  Galatians,  p,  44,  Bishop  Lightfoot's  Essay  is  so  exceedingly 
good  that  we  may  be  excused  for  making  such  long  quotations  from 
it.     The  whole  of  it  deserves  careful  reading. 


DATE    OF   THE   EPISTLE.  127 

and  with  the  results   of  our  reasoning  respecting  the 
destination  of  the  Epistle. 

Now,  let  it  be  noted  first  of  all  that  the  date  we  are 
supporting  in  no  way  conflicts  with  the  South  Galatian 
theory.  For  the  only  way  in  which,  so  far  as  I  can 
see,  it  can  conflict  with  it  is  to  be  found  in  the  two 
expressions  to  irporepov  (Gal.  iv.  13)  and  ovrcog 
Ta-^ew9  (Gal.  i.  6).  I  do  not  see  any  other  single 
point  of  conflict.  And  after  all  what  are  these  ? 
Why,  even  on  Lightfoot's  own  confession  we  cannot 
press  the  meaning  of  to  irpoTepov  to  be  on  the  former 
of  my  visits,  implying  that  there  were  only  two.  to 
TTpoTcpov  may  quite  well  mean  formerly,  the  words 
being  intended  to  mark  a  contrast  between  once  and 
710VJ.  I  have  argued  at  length  in  the  fifth  chapter  of 
this  Essay  that  this  is  the  more  likely  meaning,  prin- 
cipally on  the  ground  that  this  makes  better  sense  of 
the  whole  passage,  the  reading  of  which  must  not  be 
interrupted  at  to  irpoTcpov,  as  if  the  sentence  Si 
acrQeveiav  Tr]9  crapKog  ewj'yyeXiG-aiuLi]^  v/uliv  to  irpoTepov 
could  be  understood  apart  from  kul  tov  Treipaa-niov  v/ucov 
K.T.\. ;  and  partly  because  the  rendering  of  to  irpoTcpov, 
as  on  tlie  former  of  my  ttvo  visits,  seems  to  me  hardly 
admissible  logically.  For  I  take  it  that  the  natural 
meaning  would  be,  if  the  adverb  be  comparatively  used, 
that  "  because  of  an  infirmity  of  the  flesh  I  evangelised 
you  on  the  former  occasion  of  my  evangelising."  And 
I  question  whether  in  New  Testament  language  a 
second  evangelisation  is  possible.  But  I  do  not  press 
this  last  point  if  others  difter  from  me.  I  still  think 
that  the  other  rendering  is  the  one  that  accords  best 


128        THE  EPISTLE    TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

with  the  context,  and  on  that  account  alone  I  should 
prefer  it. 

Then  let  us  look  at  ol/tco?  ra^^eco?.  This  expression 
we  have  already  examined  in  the  preceding  chapter, 
and  we  have  there  decided  that  there  is  not  implied 
in  the  words  any  necessary  comparison  with  some 
independent  point  of  time.  The  words  may  mean 
so  hastily,  so  quiddy,  and  need  not  be  rendered  so  soon. 
And  even  if  they  mean  so  soon,  there  is  nothing  to 
indicate  for  certain  from  what  time  so  soon  is  to  be 
reckoned. 

It  will  be  well  to  look  at  the  question  of  this 
Galatian  defection  in  relation  to  our  present  hypothesis 
as  to  the  date  of  the  Epistle.  We  are  assuming  the 
Epistle  to  be  one  of  four  composed  on  the  third 
missionary  journey.  We  have  already,  in  chapter  vi., 
been  getting  an  insight  into  some  of  the  work  that 
engaged  the  Apostle  during  that  time.  We  have  seen 
cfoine-  on  the  collection  of  alms  for  the  saints  at 
Jerusalem,  and  we  have  seen  the  activity  necessitated 
by  this — delegates  sent  to  collect,  and  representatives 
of  the  churches  coming  back  with  them  to  go  to 
Jerusalem  with  the  Apostle  to  minister  the  gift  to 
those  for  whom  it  was  intended.  All  this  we  have 
seen.  And  does  not  this  show  us  how  St.  Paul  must 
have  been  in  constant  communication  with  the  different 
churches  ?  how  he  must  have  had  news  of  them  ? 
This  is  implied  in  his  own  words  in  2  Cor.  xi.  28: 
')(wph  rwv  irapeKTog  i)  eirLG-TaaLg  juol  ij  KaO'  r/^epav  rj 
_j  jmepijupa  iracrwi/  toov   eKKX^jcnon'.     Anxiety  about   all    the 

churches — may   not    the    Galatian    defection     be     one 


DATE   OF   THE   EPISTLE.  129 

cause    of    such    anxiety?      We    have    seen    that    this  .    --^ 

Epistle    to    the    Corinthians    was   probably  composed  ' 

just  before  that  to  the  Galatians.  May  not  then,  the  .  ^^^  ^^ 
Galatian  apostasy  be  already  known  to  St.  Paul  when  '^  ^^'^^ . 
he  wrote  of  his  "anxiety"?  May  he  not  have  heard 
of  it  from  one  of  his  ministering  agents,  who  had  been  ' 
visiting^  the  churches  of  Galatia  in  connection  with  the 
collection  for  the  saints  ?  May  it  not  be  that  this 
agent  had  brought  news  to  St.  Paul  when  he  was 
at  Ephesus,  or  at  Troas,  or  after  he  crossed  to  Mace- 
donia ?  These  are  questions  we  cannot  decide ;  but 
we  can  see  how  easily  possible,  under  the  circum- 
stances, it  was  for  St.  Paul  to  have  had  information  of 
the  defection  of  the  Galatians  from  the  pure  Christian 
Gospel  he  had  given  them  ;  and  we  can  understand 
how  the  news  of  their  apostasy  may  have  startled 
him,  coming  as  it  may  have  done  soon  after  a  report 
he  had  had  of  them  of  a  different  character.  And 
we  need  not  wonder  if  he  writes :  /  marvel  that 
ye  are  so  quickly  removing  from  him  that  called 
you,  etc. 

We  can  never  finally  explain  ovrm  rayeoy^,  because 
we  can  never  know  the  exact  circumstances ;  but  we 
can  easily  see  that  an  explanation  is  not  an  impos- 
sibility. 

I  see,  then,  no  serious  difficulty,  but  only  a  necessity 
to  acknowledge  ignorance  when  we  read  QaviJiaXco  on 
ovTw<i  Tay(€m  lULeTarlOecrOe  k.t.X. 

It  is  worth  observing  that  Lightfoot,  who  interpreted 
ouToog  Tu-)(€(C9  to  mean  so  soon  after  your  call,  yet 
considered   that   an   interval   of  ten   years    might    be 

I  ^-^ 


f.f-.u.^"--  '" 


^v 


1.30        THE   EPISTLE    TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

allowed  without  a  straining  of  language.^  I  cannot, 
then,  see  that  there  is  any  necessary  conflict  between 
the  vSouth  Galatian  theory  and  the  date  of  the  Epistle 
for  which  we  are  contending,  even  if  0L/Ta)9  Taye(jo<i 
be  interpreted  at  the  greatest  disadvantage  to  the 
theory  of  the  destination  of  the  Epistle  which  we 
have  adopted. 

Then,  as  to  the  greeting  from  those  described  as 
,  ol  (Tvv  ejuiol  TTcci/re?  aSeXcpoi,  we  know  that  at  this  point 
in  the  third  missionary  journey  St.  Paul  must  have 
been  constantly  joined  by  those  who  were  ministering 
for  him  in  the  matter  of  the  collection  for  the  saints, 
and  we  can  well  understand  that  the  Epistle  to  the 
Galatians  may  have  been  written  when  he  had  several 
of  these  with  him.  The  mention  of  Gains,  a  man  of 
Macedonia,  who  is  coupled  with  Aristarchus  in  Acts 
'Ckv^^JU  xix.  29,  and  of  Erastus  along  with  Timothy  in  the 
6^i      ..r  22nd   verse,  shows   that  there  were  others  travelling 

with  the  Apostle  and  ministering  for  him  besides  those 
who  were  to  cjo  to  Jerusalem  with  him.  And  there  is 
no  period  in  the  whole  of  St.  Paul's  ministry  when,  so 
far  as  we  know,  such  a  greeting  as  that  in  the  Galatian 
Epistle  would  seem  more  appropriate. 

It  may  also  be  pointed  out  that  if  this  date  be 
correct,  Titus  would  be  known  to  the  churches  of 
Galatia,  for  it  is  most  probable,  as  he  is  with  St. 
Paul  and  is  his  messenger  to  the  Corinthian  Church, 
as  we  have  already  seen,  that  he  had  come  with  the 
Apostle  from  Syria.       The  reference  to  Titus,  then,  in 

^  Galatians,  p.  42. 


J  • 


^/> 


DATE   OF   THE  EPISTLE.  131 

the    Galatian    Epistle    {loace    Professor    Ramsay)     is 
naturally  explained. 

It  is  quite  possible,  again,  that  the  words  of  iv.  16, 
"  So  then  am  I  become  your  enemy,  because  I  tell  you 
the  truth  ?"  may  have  reference  to  something  that  St. 
Paul  had  said  to  the  Galatians  when  he  visited 
them  on  his  way  to  Ephesus.  But  it  is  better  to 
acknowledge  that  we  have  no  real  clue  to  the  meaning 
of  the  words,  which  we  may  reasonably  think  would  be 
quite  intelligible  if  we  knew  all  the  circumstances/ 

But  we  may  ask  what  interval  of  time  is  possible 
between  the  writing  of  the  Epistle  to  the  Galatians 
and  that  to  the  Romans  on  our  present  hypothesis. 
To  this  query  I  think  it  would  be  fair  to  answer,  that 
the  Epistle  to  the  Romans  being  written  from  Corinth, 
that  to  the  Galatians  might  reasonably  be  put  back  to 
the  time  just  after  2  Corinthians  was  written  in 
Macedonia,  not  very  long  after  St.  Paul  crossed  over 
from  Troas  in  his  anxiety  to  meet  Titus.  For  suppos- 
ing the  Epistle  to  the  Galatians  to  have  been  written 
just  after  2  Corinthians,  we  can  well  understand  how 
the  subject  of  the  Galatian  Epistle  must  have  been 
working  itself  out  to  its  final  conclusion  in  the  Roman 
Epistle  in  St.  Paul's  mind.  We  can  understand  how 
it  may  have  formed  the  basis  of  that  "  much  exhor- 
tation" (TrapaKoXecrai?   avTOv<i  Xoycp  ttoXXo)),  which  St. 

^  I  cannot  help  thinking  that  it  may  be  possible  to  interpret  these 
words  as  applying  to  what  St.  Paul  had  said  in  the  Epistle  itself. 
It  is  as  if  he  said  :  "I  hope  I  have  not  become  your  enemy  now  by 
my  plain  speaking."  For,  remember,  he  has  already  called  them 
senseless  Galatians  and  said  other  hard  things  in  iv^  9,  10. 


132        THE  EPISTLE    TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

Luke  tells  us  the  Apostle  gave  in  Macedonia  as  he 
went  to  Achaia  (Acts  xx.  2).  Any  one  who  has  had  to 
preach  much  and  often,  knows  how  so  doing  tends  to 
bring  into  focus  some  subject  which  is  much  dealt 
with.  And  the  same  applies  to  constant  teaching 
other  than  that  from  the  pulpit.  The  Epistle  to  the 
Eomans  seems  to  me  to  be  just  such  a  treatise  as 
would  result  from  the  Apostle  turning  over  the  subject 
of  the  Galatian  Epistle  constantly  in  his  mind,  and 
presenting  its  argument  in  many  discourses  to  others. 
I  believe  the  Epistle  to  the  Galatians  to  be  inspired, 
and  I  believe  the  Epistle  to  the  Eomans  to  be  inspired, 
because  they  are  the  products  of  an  inspired  mind,  but 
I  believe  all  the  same  that  the  argument  of  the  Epistle 
to  the  Eomans  is  evolved  from  that  contained  in  the 
Galatian  Epistle,  and  that  this  evolution  was  brought 
about  in  a  natural  way.  The  most  likely  way  I  can 
conceive  of  is,  that  the  Apostle  thought  much  and 
talked  much  of  the  subject  until  it  assumed  its  final 
form.  In  all  this  there  is  the  working  of  the  Spirit  of 
God,  but  on  a  man's  mind  and  not  on  a  machine. 

The  conclusion  to  which  we  have  come,  then,  is  that 
the  Epistle  to  the  Galatians  is  to  be  dated  shortly 
after  the  second  to  the  Corinthians.  That  date, 
suggested  by  the  similarity  between  the  Eoman  and 
Galatian  Epistles,  taken  as  a  working  hypothesis,  is 
perfectly  consistent  with  the  contents  of  the  Epistle  to 
the  Galatians,  and  it  reasonably  accounts  for  such  an 
expression  as  all  the  hrethren  who  are  with  me.  Such  a 
date,  too,  synchronising  as  it  does  with  the  much 
preaching  of  Acts  xx.  2,  accounts  perfectly  well  for  a 


DATE    OF   THE   EPISTLE.  133 

period  of  such  development  of  thought  as  took  place 
between  the  composition  of  the  Galatian  and  lloman 
Epistles  respectively. 

It  has  been  urged  by  Mr.  F.  EendalP  as  an  argument 
against  this  dating  of  the  Epistle,  that  the  Epistle  is  -^ 

silent  as  to  the  collection  for  the  saints ;  a  fact  that  is 
inexplicable  if  the  Epistle  was  written  just  at  the 
time  when  the  importance  of  this  collection  was  clearest 
to  the  Apostle's  mind.  We  may  set  against  this  objec- 
tion some  words  of  Bishop  Lightfoot's.     He  writes  :  ^ 

"  A  little  later  on  another  passage  occurs  in  which 
the  vehemence  of  St.  Paul's  language  is  quite  unin- 
telligible at  first  sight.  '  Be  not  deceived,'  he  says, 
*  God  is  not  mocked,  for  whatsoever  a  man  soweth, 
that  shall  he  reap.  .  .  .  Let  us  do  good  unto  all  men  ' 
(Gal.  vi.  7-10).  The  admonition  is  thrown  into  a 
general  form,  but  it  has  evidently  a  special  application 
in  the  Apostle's  own  mind.  An  allusion  in  the  First 
Epistle  to  the  Corinthians  supplies  the  key  to  the 
difficulty.  *  As  I  gave  orders  to  the  Churches  of 
Galatia,  even  so  do  ye.'  He  had  solicited  their  alms 
for  the  suffering  brethren  of  Judaea.  The  messenger, 
who  had  brought  him  word  of  the  spread  of  Judaism  I 
among  the  Galatians,  had  also,  I  suppose,  reported  ' 
unfavourably  of  their  liberality.  They  had  not  responded 
heartily  to  his  appeal.  He  reproves  them  in  con- 
sequence for  their  backwardness.  .  .  ." 

And  it  is  a  piece  of  corroborative  evidence  in  favour 
of  this   dating    that,  as  Lightfoot  has  pointed  out,  the 

^  Expositor,  1894,  p.  261.  ^  Galatians,  p.  55. 


134        THE  EPISTLE   TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

opening  words  of  Gal.  vi.,  "  Brethren,  even  if  a  man 
be  overtaken  in  any  trespass,  ye  which  are  spiritual 
restore  such  a  one  in  the  spirit  of  meekness  ;  looking  to 
thyself  lest  thou  also  be  tempted,"  receive  a  natural 
explanation  if  we  remember  that  the  Apostle  had  just 
been  writing  to  the  Corinthians  concerning  the  in- 
cestuous person  whose  punishment  he  had  insisted  on 
J  in  the  first  Epistle  :   "  Sufficient  to  such  a  one  is  this 

punishment  which  was  inflicted  by  the  many  ;  so  that 
contrariwise  ye  should  rather  forgive  him  and  comfort 
him,  lest  by  any  means  such  a  one  should  be  swallowed 
up  with  his  overmuch  sorrow  "  (2  Cor.  ii.  6,  7).  The 
Corinthians,  from  being  indifferent,  had  turned  to  harsh- 
ness and  vindictiveness,  which  the  Apostle  has  here  to 
reprove. 

In  conclusion,  then,  we  pay  our  tribute  of  grati- 
tude to  the  great  Scholar  and  Bishop  who  has 
proved  by  arguments  so  clear  and  cogent  that  the 
Epistle  to  the  Galatians  is  one  of  four  of  the  third 
missionary  journey.  We  do  this  the  more  readily 
because  we  have  had  to  differ  from  him  in  regard  to 
the  Destination  of  the  Epistle.  But  this  difference 
from  one  from  whom  so  much  has  been  learnt,  and  yet 
will  be  learnt,  is  not  one  that  need  be  regretted  ;  for  if 
Bishop  Lightfoot  were  now  alive,  he  would,  we  believe, 
be  the  first  to  acknowledge  that  he  was  wrong,  and 
that  Professor  Eanisay  deserves  the  thanks  of  all 
Biblical  students  for  interpreting  that  expression,  so 
impossible  to  understand  without  just  that  historical 
grasp  of  Asia  Minor  which  he  has  won  for  himself — 
Ty]V   ^pvyiav   koi   TaXaTiKrjv   -^wpav. 


APPENDIX. 


THE  VISIT  TO  JERUSALEM  REFERRED  TO  IN 
GALATIANS  11. 

It  will  not  be  amiss  to  consider  briefly  the  problem 
of  identifying  the  visit  to  Jerusalem  recorded  in 
Gal.  ii.  with  one  of  the  visits  of  the  Acts.  This  is,  I 
venture  to  think,  a  question  that  has  been  better  left 
until  after  a  thorousfh  investis^ation  had  been  made  of 
(1)  the  Locality  of  the  churches  of  Galatia,  and  (2)  the 
Date  of  the  Galatian  Epistle.  As  I  have  already  said, 
the  result  of  trying  to  treat  three  different  problems 
all  at  once  is  inevitably  confusion.  But  now  that  we 
have  given  what  we  believe  to  be  the  correct  answers 
to  the  two  questions:  Whither  and  AVhence  was  the 
Epistle  to  the  Galatians  written  ?  we  may  turn  to  this 
third  question :  With  which  visit  recorded  in  the  Acts 
is  the  visit  of  Gal.  ii.  to  be  identified? 

Now,  the  historian  of  the  Acts  has  to  tell  of  five 
visits  to  Jerusalem  paid  by  St.  Paul  after  his  con- 
version. 

1.  The  visit  recorded  in  Acts  ix.  26  ff.  This  visit 
must  without  question  be  identified  with  that  referred 
to  in  Gal.  i.   18,  19  in  the  words:  "Then   after  three 


138       THE  EPISTLE    TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

years  I  went  up  to  Jerusalem  to  visit  Cephas,  and 
tarried  with  him  fifteen  days.  But  other  of  the  apostles 
saw  I  none,  save  James  the  Lord's  brother."  It  is  true 
that,  without  St.  Paul's  own  account  of  his  visit,  which 
he  declares  (with  the  solemn  asseveration.  Behold,  hefore 
God,  I  lie  not)  to  have  been  iJ.eTa  rpla  ert],  we  should  have 
supposed  from  St.  Luke's  narrative  that  the  interval 
between  the  conversion  and  this  visit  was  shorter  than 
this.  But,  of  course,  the  words  juera  rpla  ert]  do  not 
imply  an  interval  of  three  years  according  to  Jewish 
reckoning,  as  we  know  from  the  quotation  of  our 
Lord's  words,  /xera  rpeh  ^jmepag  eyelpo/uLat  (Matt,  xxvii. 
63),  which  we  compare  with  rtj  TpLTt]  ^/uepa  eyep- 
Swerm  in  Matt.  xvii.  23. 

2.  The  visit  recorded  in  Acts  xi.  29,  30  in  the  words: 
"And  the  disciples,  every  man  according  to  his  ability, 
determined  to  send  relief  unto  the  brethren  that  dwelt 
in  Judea;  which  also  they  did,  sending  it  to  the 
elders  by  the  hand  of  Barnabas  and  Saul."  That  this 
visit  to  Judea  was  in  actual  fact  one  to  Jerusalem  is 
clear  from  Acts  xii.  25:  "And  Barnabas  and  Saul 
returned  from  Jerusalem,^  when  they  had  fulfilled  their 
ministration,  taking  with  them  John  whose  surname 
was  Mark." 

3.  The  visit  of  Acts  xv.  2  ff.:  "And  when  Paul 
and  Barnabas  had  no  small  dissension  and  questioning 
with  them,  the  brethren  appointed  that  Paul  and 
Barnabas,  and  certain  other  of  them,  should  go  up  to 
Jerusalem  unto  the  apostles  and  elders  about  this 
question " ;  the  question  being,  as  the  first  verse 
explains,  whether  circumcision  was  essential   to  salva- 

^  It  is  unnecessary  here  to  touch  on  the  readings  i^  and  et'y. 


VISIT   TO   JERUSALEM  OF  GAL.   IL         139 

tion.     No  less  than  twenty-nine  verses  of  this  chapter 
are  taken  up  with  this  visit. 

4.  The  visit  implied  in  Acts  xviii.  22,  though 
Jerusalem  is  not  actually  mentioned :  "  And  when  he 
had  landed  at  Caesarea,  he  went  up  and  saluted  the 
church,  and  went  down  to  Antioch."  No  one  is  likely 
to  question  that  a  visit  to  Jerusalem  is  implied  in  the 
words,  "  he  went  up  and  saluted  the  church." 

5.  The  visit  after  the  third  missionary  journey 
detailed  in  Acts  xxi.    15-xxiii.   30. 

We  have  no  reason  to  think  that  St.  Paul  visited 
Jerusalem  after  the  date  of  his  conversion  more  than 
these  five  times. 

Now,  there  can  be  no  question  that  the  whole  point 
of  St.  Paul's  argument  in  the  first  two  chapters  of  his 
Epistle  to  the  Galatians  is  the  fact  that  his  Apostolic 
authority  was  conferred  upon  him  from  above,  and  that 
it  in  no  way  depended  on  those  who  were  Apostles 
before  him  for  its  validity.  The  opening  words  of  the 
Epistle,  "Paul,  an  apostle,  not  from  men,  neither 
through  man,  but  through  Jesus  Christ,  and  God  the 
Father,  who  raised  him  from  the  dead,"  may  be  looked 
upon  as  the  enunciation  of  a  proposition  of  which 
chapters  i.  and  ii.  are  the  demonstration.  "  I  did 
not,"  St.  Paul  says,  "  receive  the  gospel  from  man, 
nor  w^as  I  taught  it,  but  through  revelation  of  Jesus 
Christ.  For  ..."  and  then  follows  the  proof 
of  this  statement. 

The  proof  may  be  summed  up  thus:  (1)  He  was 
once  a  persecutor  of  the  Church  of  God,  and  desisted 
because  of  a  revelation  of  the  Son  of  God.     (2)  When 


140        THE  EPISTLE    TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

he  was  called,  he  did  not  confer  with  man,  not  even 
with  those  who  were  Apostles  before  him.  (3)  Not 
until  ik€.Ta  rpla  eri]  did  he  go  up  to  Jerusalem;  then 
he  did  go  to  visit  Cephas,  with  whom  he  stayed  fifteen 
days ;  but  other  of  the  Apostles  saw  he  none,  save 
James  the  Lord's  brother.  (4)  Then  he  came  into 
Syria  and  Cilicia,  and  remained  unknown  to  the 
churches  of  Judaea  except  by  hearsay.  (5)  Then 
Sia  SeKarea-a-apcov  erwv  he  went  up  again  to  Jerusalem, 
but  hy  revelation,  and  conferred  with  James  and 
Cephas  and  John,  who  gave  to  him  (and  Barnabas) 
the  right  hands  of  fellowship,  recognising  the  grace 
that  was  given  to  him,  and  that  he  had  been  already 
entrusted  {ireirLo-TeviJLaL)  with  the  gospel  of  the 
Uncircumcision  as  Peter  was  with  that  of  the 
Circumcision. 

Here  is  the  whole  point  of  the  argument.  His 
Apostleship  of  the  Gentiles  was  independent  of 
those  who  "  were  Apostles  before  him." 

Now,  it  must  be  noticed  that  Barnabas  plays  a 
prominent  part  in  this  visit  to  Jerusalem  of  chapter  ii. 
This  fact  disposes,  I  think,  once  and  for  all  of  any 
possibility  of  identifying  this  particular  visit  with  any 
visit  recorded  in  the  Acts  later  than  the  third  of  the 
five  enumerated  above.  After  that  visit  the  split 
occurred  between  Barnabas  and  Paul ;  and  even  if  the 
two  met  as  friends  again,  there  is  no  room  for  a  visit 
of  the  two  together  to  Jerusalem  in  the  Acts.  To 
say  that  this  was  some  visit  not  recorded  in  the 
Acts  is  to  suggest  something  highly  improbable. 
It  is  certainly  not  a  hypothesis  deserving  of  any 
attention    unless    we    can    show    that    the    visit    of 


VISIT   TO   JERUSALEM   OF  GAL.   IL         141 

Galatians    ii.    is    irreconcilable    with    those    actually 
recorded  by   St.    Luke. 

So,  then,  the  visit  of  Galatians  ii.  is  likely  to  be 
either  the  second  or  third  visit  recorded  in  the 
Acts.  Our  purpose  now  is  to  discuss  which  of 
these  two  is  the  more  likely.  . 

Now,  if  the  visit  of  Gal.  ii.  be  identified  with  the 
second  visit  of  the  Acts,  then  it  took  place  hefore 
St.  Paul's  first  missionary  journey,  that  is,  before  he 
founded  the  churches  of  Galatia,  which  we  have  seen 
reason  to  interpret  as  the  churches  of  Antioch  and 
Iconium,  and  Lystra  and  Derbe. 

If,  on  the  other  hand,  the  visit  of  Gal.  ii.  be  identified 
with  the  tliircl  visit  of  the  Acts,  it  took  place  after  St. 
Paul's  first  missionary  journey,  that  is,  after  he  founded 
the  churches  of  Galatia,  for  whom  the  argument  of  his 
Epistle  w^as  intended. 

The  question  then  arises  (and  it  is  well  to  face  it  at 
once) :  Does  the  argument  of  the  Epistle  make  it 
necessary  that  we  should  suppose  that  the  visit  to 
Jerusalem  recorded  in  Gal.  ii.  took  place  before  St. 
Paul  became  an  Apostle  to  the  churches  of  Galatia? 
It  is  important  to  have  an  ansv/er  to  this  question. 
For  if  we  think  that  the  Jerusalem  visit  of  Gal.  ii. 
must  precede  the  founding  of  the  churches  of  Galatia 
in  order  that  St.  Paul's  argument  may  not  become 
invalidated,  we  shall,  if  we  have  already  made  up  our 
minds  that  the  South  Galatian  theory  is  true,  rush  to 
the  conclusion  that  the  visit  of  Gal.  ii.  must  be 
identified  with  the  second  visit  of  the  Acts,  mz.\  that 
recorded  in  Acts  xi.  29,  30. 


142        THE  EPISTLE    TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

It  is  proposed  now  to  show  that  the  identification  of 
the  visit  of  Gal.  ii.  with  a  visit  in  the  Acts  is  aMolutely 
independent  of  the  South  Galatia.n  theory.  To  prove 
this,  we  have  to  show  that  St.  Paul's  argument  respect- 
ing the  independence  of  his  Apostolic  authority  of 
those  who  were  Apostles  before  him  does  not  depend 
for  its  validity  on  the  visit  to  Jerusalem,  recorded  in 
the  second  chapter,  being  prior  to  the  founding  of 
the  churches  of  Galatia  to  whom  the  Epistle  was 
addressed. 

For  let  us  take  it,  as  a  temporary  hypothesis,  that 
the  preaching  of  the  Gospel  by  St.  Paul  in  what 
henceforth  became  the  churches  of  Galatia  preceded 
the  visit  to  Jerusalem  of  Gal.  ii.  What  becomes 
of  the  argument  respecting  St.  Paul's  independent 
Apostolic  authority  ?  Is  it  reduced  to  nonsense,  or 
does  it  still  stand  ?  My  answer  to  this  is  that 
the  argument  is  in  no  way  weakened,  but  rather 
strengthened. 

For  when  we  come  to  look  at  the  place  in  the 
argument  occupied  by  the  visit  to  Jerusalem,  on  our 
present  hypothesis,  we  see  that  the  point  of  its  being 
mentioned  becomes  perfectly  lucid.  In  the  first 
chapter  of  the  Epistle  St.  Paul  has  made  it  clear 
that,  at  any  rate  up  to  the  founding  of  the  churches 
of  Galatia,  he  was  independent  of  those  who  were 
Apostles  before  him.  After  their  founding  he  goes 
up,  as  we  read  in  the  second  chapter,  to  Jerusalem 
along  with  Barnabas,  and  confers  with  "  those  who  were 
of  repute  "  {Tol<i  Sokovq-iv).  He  confers  privately  with 
them.  He  lays  before  them  the  Gospel  which  he  is 
already  preaching  (o  Ktjpva-a-co)  among  the  Gentiles,  but 


VISIT   TO   JERUSALEM   OF  GAL.   II.         143 

privately,  lest  by  any  means  "  he  should  be  running  or 
was  running  in  vain." 

We  had  better  lay  hold  of  this  remarkable  expres- 
sion. St.  Paul  recognises  here  that  if  he  were  not  an 
Apostle  his  work  among  the  Gentiles  had  been  in 
vain.  -^  The  work  he  had  already  done  in  founding  the 
churches  of  Galatia  was  no  true  work  at  all.  It  was 
to  no  purpose  {ek  Kevov).  No  subsequent  transference 
of  authority  committed  to  him  by  the  Apostles  could 
be  retrospective.  The  work  was  in  vain  if  he  were 
not  already  an  Apostle.  St.  Paul  does  not  shrink  from 
this  admission. 

Was  he  then  an  Apostle  ?  That  is  exactly  his 
point,  that  "  those  of  repute  "  {ol  SoKovvre^)  who,  by 
the  Judaisers,  are  extolled  as  the  true  pillars  of  the 
Church,  recognised  and  allowed  that  he  was  an  Apostle. 
They  did  not  make  him  an  Apostle  by  their  recognition 
of  him.  They  acknowledged  that  he  was  already  an 
Apostle.  Let  us  quote  St.  Paul's  own  words  (vv.  6  ff.) : 
"But  from  those  who  were  reputed  to  be  somewhat 
(whatsoever  they  were,  it  maketh  no  matter  to  me : 
God  accepteth  not  man's  person) — they,  I  say,  who 
were  of  repute  imparted  nothing  to  me ;  but  con- 
trariwise, when  they  saw  that  I  had  been  intrusted 
(ireirlcTTevij.aL)  with  the  gospel  of  the  uncircumcision, 
even  as  Peter  with  that  of  the  circumcision  (for  he 
that  wrought  for  Peter  unto  the  apostleship  of  the 
circumcision  wrought  for  me  also  unto  the  Gentiles) ; 
and   when  they  perceived  the  grace   that   was   given 

^  It  is,  of  course,  a  subject  alien  to  our  present  one,  but  these  words 
are  not  without  their  bearing  on  the  Apostolic  foundation  of  the 
Church. 


144        THE  EPISTLE    TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

unto  me,  James  and  Cephas  and  John,  they  who 
were  reputed  to  be  pillars,  gave  to  me  and  Barnabas  the 
right  hands  of  fellowship,  that  we  should  go  unto  the 
Gentiles,  and  they  unto  the  circumcision." 

It  may,  then,  be  stated  emphatically  that  St.  Paul's 
argument  to  prove  the  independence  of  his  Apostolic 
authority  is  in  no  way  invalidated,  if  the  founding 
of  the  churches  of  Galatia  preceded  the  visit  to 
Jerusalem  recorded  in  the  second  chapter  of  the 
Epistle. 

We  might  even  go  further  than  this  and  say  that 
the  argument  is  made  stronger.  For  then  the  visit 
to  Jerusalem,  when  real  conference  was  held  with 
"  the  pillars  "  of  the  circumcision,  had  not  even  taken 
place  when  the  Galatians  were  evangelised.  A  fortiori, 
then,  was  that  preaching  independent  of  any  other 
Apostolic  authority  than  St.  Paul's  own.  In  this 
case  it  was  only  after  his  larger  work  among  the 
Gentiles  was  begun  that  an  interchange  of  views 
took  place  between  him  and  those  who  were  Apostles 
before  him.  And  that  work  was  recognised  by  the 
Apostles  at  Jerusalem,  not  in  prospect  merely,  but 
as  a  fait  accompli.  He  was  proved  to  be  an  Apostle 
by  what  he  had  done  as  much  as  by  what  he  claimed 
to  be  commissioned  to  do. 

And  certainly  it  might  be  argued  that  the  visit 
to  Jerusalem  under  discussion  was  after  the  founding 
of  the  churches  of  Galatia,  because  St.  Paul  uses 
the  word  um«?  in  connection  with  this  visit.  He 
says  that,  when  he  was  in  Jerusalem,  he  would 
not    yield    to    the    Judaisers    in    the    matter    of    the 


VISIT   TO   JERUSALEM   OF  GAL.   11.         145 

circumcision  of  Titus  in  order  that  the  truth  of  the 
Gospel  may  continue  with  yon.  I  have  already  said 
(p.  81)  that  I  do  not  consider  this  interpretation  of 
vixa<i  as  certain.  For  St.  Paul  might  quite  well  be 
speaking  prospectively  in  using  the  word  uyota?.  It 
was,  after  all,  not  for  the  Galatians  in  particular 
that  he  was  contending,  but  for  the  Gentiles  generally 
who  should  accept  the  Gospel. 

I  hope,  then,  I  may  claim  to  have  made  good 
my  contention  that  it  is  not  necessary,  for  the 
validity  of  St.  Paul's  argument  in  defence  of  his 
independent  Apostolic  commission,  that  the  visit  to 
Jerusalem  in  Gal.  ii.  should  have  preceded  the 
evangelisation  of  those  to  whom  the  Epistle  was 
addressed.  Professor  Eamsay  has  said  that  "  visits 
paid  after  St.  Paul  had  converted  the  Galatian 
churches  did  not  enter  into  his  argument."  ^  I 
venture  to  say  that  this  is  not  proved ;  nor  can  it 
be  proved  without  deciding  the  main  question  of  the 
correct  identification  of  the  visit  to  Jerusalem. 

As  has  been  already  pointed  out,  the  problem  of 
the  identification  of  the  visit  to  Jerusalem  can  and 
must  be  kept  separate  from  that  of  the  locality 
of  the  churches  of  Galatia.  Professor  Eamsay  has 
nothing  to  fear  for  his  South  Galatian  theory.  A 
general  acceptance  of  that  is  a  matter  of  time.  But 
unless  the  Professor  will  learn  to  separate  from  his 
theory  those  other  theories  of  his,  mz.  that  the 
Galatian  Epistle  dates  from  Antioch,  and  that  the 
visit   to  Jerusalem  is    the   second    of  the   five   visits 

^  Church  in  the  Roman  Empire,  p.  109. 
K 


146        THE  EPISTLE    TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

in  the  Acts,  he  must  not  be  surprised  if  some,  who 
see  Bishop  Lightfoot's  arguments  for  a  different 
dating  of  the  Epistle  and  a  different  identification 
of  the  Jerusalem  visit  to  be  unanswered,  still  adhere 
also  to  the  North  Galatian  theory. 

Seeing,  then,  that  St.  Paul's  argument  does  not 
need  for  its  validity  the  assumption  that  the  visit 
to  Jerusalem  preceded  the  founding  of  the  churches 
of  Galatia;  but  that,  on  the  other  hand,  the  argument 
is  valid,  whether  the  visit  be  before  or  after  the 
founding  of  those  churches,  we  will  approach  the 
subject  independently  of  any  presupposition  in  regard 
to  this. 

Xow,  in  regard  to  the  first  of  the  two  visits  to 
Jerusalem  in  the  Acts  with  which  it  is  at  all  likely 
that  the  visit  of  Gal.  ii.  is  to  be  identified — that  is, 
the  second  of  all  the  five  visits,  viz.  that  in  Acts  xi. 
29,  30 — St.  Luke  has  very  little  to  say.  But  that 
little  leaves  us  in  no  doubt  as  to  the  purpose  for 
which  Paul  and  Barnabas  went  up  to  Jerusalem. 
Agabus,  a  prophet,  had  signified  by  the  Spirit  that 
there  should  be  a  famine  over  all  the  world.  This 
famine  came  to  pass  in  the  reign  of  Claudius.  Mean- 
while, the  disciples  determined  to  send  to  minister 
to  the  brethren  that  were  in  Judaea  {eh  SiaKovlav 
Trejuyp^ai  toi?  KaTOiKovanv  ev  tij  ^louoala  aoeXcpoh). 
This  determination  was  carried  out,  and  Paul  and 
Barnabas  were  deputed  to  take  the  offering  to  the 
elders  at  Jerusalem.  Beyond  the  fact  that  they 
carried  out  their  duties  we  have  no  information. 

Of  the   next   visit  (Acts  xv.)    St.   Luke  has    much 


VISIT   TO   JERUSALEM  OF  GAL.    11.         147 

more  to  say.  The  purpose  of  this  visit  also  was 
definite,  and,  as  far  as  we  can  tell,  one.  Certain 
men  had  come  down  from  Judaea  to  Antioch  and 
taught  the  brethren,  saying,  "  Except  ye  be  circum- 
cised after  the  custom  of  Moses  ye  cannot  be  saved." 
With  these  Judaisers  Paul  and  Barnabas  had  no 
small  dissension  and  questioning,  and  it  was  arranged 
(era^av — presumably  the  subject  of  this  is  to  be  under- 
stood to  be  the  hrethren)  that  Paul  and  Barnabas, 
and  certain  others  of  them,  should  o-o  to  Jerusalem 
to  the  Apostles  and  elders  about  this  question.  So 
was  brought  about  the  Jerusalem  Council,  whose 
decisions  are  recorded  in  Acts  xv.  22-29.  It  will 
be  observed  that  those  decisions  have  reference  to 
one  question,  viz.  the  relation  of  Christianised  Gentiles 
to  the  Jewish  law. 

Let  us  turn  now  to  what  St.  Paul  says  of  his 
visit  to  Jerusalem  in  Galatians  ii.  He  does  not 
say  definitely  for  what  purpose  he  went  up.  He 
says  that  he  went  with  Barnabas,  taking  with  him 
Titus  also.  He  went  up  Kara  airoKoXv^iv,  and  he  laid 
before  them  (simply  avroh)  "  the  gospel  which  I  am 
preaching  among  the  Gentiles,  but  privately  to  those 
of  repute,  lest  by  any  means  I  should  run  or  was 
running  in  vain."  And  then  comes  the  emphatic 
statement :  "  But  not  even  Titus  who  was  with  me 
as  a  Gentile  ^  was  compelled  to  be  circumcised." 

We  notice,  then,  that,  while  St.  Paul  does  not 
say  that  he  came  up  to  Jerusalem  to  consult  with  the 
other   Apostles   on   the    subject  of    the   necessity  for 

^  I  have  discussed  this  phrase  in  chapter  vii. 


148        THE  EPISTLE    TO    THE  GALATIANS. 

circumcision  in  the  case  of  Gentile  converts,  he 
implies  that  the  subject  of  circumcision  was  one  on 
which  he  took  a  very  firm  ground  of  his  own  on 
this  occasion.  He  would  not  have  Titus  circumcised 
though  he  was  his  own  chosen  Gentile  companion. 

Well,  the  whole  context  implies  that  St.  Paul  won 
his  point.  Those  of  repute  (ot  ^oKovvre^^  imparted 
nothing  to  him  {ov^\v  Trpoa-aveOevro) ;  but,  on  the  con- 
trary, they  saw  (ISoure^)  that  he  had  been  entrusted 
with  the  Gospel  of  the  Uncircumcision  as  Peter 
was  with  that  of  the  Circumcision ;  they  recognised 
(yvovre^)  the  grace  that  was  given  to  him,  and  so 
they — James  and  Cephas  and  John — gave  to  him 
and  Barnabas  the  right  hands  of  fellowship,  "  that 
we  should  go  to  the  Gentiles  (ra  eOv)]),  and  they  to 
the  Circumcision."  And  then  follow  these  words: 
"  Only  they  would  that  we  should  remember  the 
poor,   which  very  thing  I   was  also   zealous  to  do." 

Now,  Professor  Eamsay  has  used  these  last  words 
to  prove  that  the  visit  of  Gal.  ii.  must  be  identified 
with  the  earlier  of  the  two  visits  in  the  Acts,  which 
was  undertaken,  as  we  have  seen,  for  the  very  purpose 
of  ministering  to  those  whom  the  predicted  famine 
had  reduced  to  want.  Professor  Kamsay  further 
fortifies  his  position  by  his  understanding  of  the 
words  Kara  airoKaXvy^iv  (ii.  1)  which  he  thinks  are 
explained  by  the  prophecy  of  Agabus  spoken  through 
the  Spirit  {Sia  tou  irvevij.aTO'i). 

On  the  other  hand,  Bishop  Lightfoot  contends 
strongly  for  the  identification  of  the  visit  with  that  of 
Acts   xv.,^  and   the  particular  objections   he   makes  to 

^  Qalatiana,  pp.  123  ff. 


VISIT  TO  JERUSALEM  OF  GAL.   II        149 

the  identification,  now  advocated  by  Professor  Eamsay, 
are :  ( 1 )  that  chronologically  it  is  wrong,  as  it  would  put 
back  the  Apostle's  conversion  to  too  early  a  date  ;  and 
(2)  that  "  the  account  in  the  Epistle  clearly  implies 
that  his  Apostolic  office  and  labours  were  well  known 
and  recognised  before  this  conference." 

With  the  second  of  these  two  objections  I  find 
myself  in  agreement.  With  the  first  not  so  strongly, 
for  exact  chronology  is  always  a  matter  of  great 
difficulty. 

I  must  confess  that  it  seems  to  me  extremely 
unlikely  that  so  severe  a  struggle  as  there  evidently 
was  over  the  question  whether  Titus  should  be  circum- 
cised should  have  taken  place  during  the  visit  of  Acts 
xi.  29,  and  yet  nothing  have  been  said  about  it  by  St. 
Luke,  for  it  is  on  this  very  subject  of  circumcision 
that  he  enlarges  later  in  chapter  xv.  The  question 
was  felt  by  St.  Luke  to  have  been  an  important  one.  It 
does  not  seem  likely  that  if  the  principle  for  which  St, 
Paul  was  contending  had  been  won,  as  it  clearly  was 
won  in  the  visit  of  Gal.  ii.,  at  the  stage  of  Acts  xi.  29, 
it  would  have  come  up  again  as  a  new  question  in 
Acts  XV. 

On  the  other  hand,  it  is  not  at  all  difficult  to  under- 
stand that,  when  the  agreement  was  made  in  regard  to 
the  mission  to  the  Circumcision  and  Uncircumcision 
respectively  in  GaL  ii.,  the  Apostles  in  Jerusalem  might 
insist  on  the  necessity  for  remembering  the  poor  Jewish 
Christians  at  Jerusalem,  a  thing  which  St.  Paul  says  he 
was  himself  anxious  to  do — a  thing,  too,  which  he  later 
on  proved  himself  very  diligent  in  doing.^ 

^  See  chapter  vi.  of  this  essay  on  collection  for  the  saints. 


150        THE  EPISTLE    TO    THE   GALATJAlVS. 

Further,  although  nothing  is  said  by  St.  Luke  which 
can  be  interpreted  as  Kara  airoKakvy\nv,  we  still  feel 
that  there  is  room  for  such  "  revelation  "  in  between 
the  lines  of  the  narrative  of  the  Acts.  We  are  not 
told  the  steps  by  which  the  brethren  at  Antioch  arrived 
at  their  decision  to  send  Paul  and  Barnabas  to  the 
Apostles  and  elders  at  Jerusalem.  But  that  there  may 
have  been  "  revelation  "  by  prophets,  as  in  Acts  xiii.  2, 
is  not  at  all  impossible  nor  unlikely. 

Nor,  again,  does  the  narrative  of  Acts  xv.  make 
impossible  a  preliminary  private  conference  between 
Paul  and  Barnabas,  on  the  one  side,  and  the  other 
Apostles  on  the  other.  The  purpose  of  St.  Luke's 
narrative  in  the  Acts  is  to  explain  how  the  critical 
question  that  had  arisen  was  settled  by  universal  con- 
sent in  the  Jerusalem  Council.  St.  Paul's  purpose  in 
the  Epistle  to  the  Galatians  is  to  set  forth  his  inde- 
pendence of  those  who  were  Apostles  before  him.  Both 
accounts,  then,  may  be  perfectly  true  and  consistent, 
but  to  record  the  private  conference  would  have  been 
alien  to  St.  Luke's  purpose. 

It  seems  to  me,  then,  that  these  three  considera- 
tions in  favour  of  identifying  the  visit  of  Galatians  ii. 
with  that  of  Acts  xv.  greatly  outweigh  the  arguments 
that  have  been  given  for  the  other  identification  : 

1.  St.  Paul's  account  of  the  visit  clearly  implies 
that  his  missionary  labours  among  the  Gentiles  had 
already  begun.  This  was  the  case  at  the  time  of  Acts 
XV.,  but  not  of  Acts  xi.  29. 

2.  The  principle  of  non-circumcision  of  Gentile  con- 


VISIT   TO   JERUSALEM   OF  GAL.    IL         151 

verts  was  plainly  contended  for  and  won  in  the  visit  of 
Gal.  ii.  This  was  just  the  purpose  and  result  of  the 
visit  recorded  by  St.  Luke  in  Acts  xv. 

3.  The  account  given  by  St.  Paul  of  his  visit  shows 
how  on  the  occasion  of  it  the  other  Apostles  became 
convinced  of  his  mission  to  the  Gentiles.  They  saw 
(l^ovTGfi)  that  the  Gospel  of  the  non-circumcision  had 
been  entrusted  to  him.  With  this  fact  we  compare  St. 
Luke's  statement  that  Barnabas  and  Paul  rehearsed 
"  what  signs  and  wonders  {crrjijLela  kol  repara)  God  had 
wrought  among  the  Gentiles  by  them";-^  such  signs 
and  wonders  serving,  as  the  context  shows,  to  bring 
conviction  to  such  as  heard. 

But,  then,  it  is  argued  that,  if  the  visit  of  Gal.  ii.  be 
identified  with  that  of  Acts  xv.,  St.  Paul  becomes 
guilty  of  omitting  to  mention  one  of  his  visits  to 
Jerusalem.  And  this  visit  he  was  bound  in  all  honesty 
to  allude  to. 

To  this  an  immediate  answer  can  be  given.  The 
purpose  St.  Paul  had  in  mind  in  referring  to  his  visits 
to  Jerusalem  at  all  was  to  show  how  little  or  how 
far  he  had  had  communications  with  those  who  were 
Apostles  before  him.  He  is  not  enumerating  visits  to 
Jerusalem,  but  interviews  with  the  other  Apostles. 
Now,  there  is  nothing  in  the  narrative  of  Acts  xi.  29,  30 
to  lead  us  to  conclude  that  on  his  second  visit  after  his 
conversion  he  had  any  conference  with  Apostles.  The 
"  relief "  for  the  brethren  in  Judaea  was  sent  to  the 
elders.  The  time  was  one  of  persecution,  and,  as  Bishop 
Lightfoot    has   suggested,  it   is   quite  likely  that   the 

1  Acts  XV.  12.     Cf.  2  Cor.  xii.  12. 


152        THE  EPISTLE    TO    THE   GALATIANS. 

Apostles  were  not  just  then  in  Jerusalem  (Acts  xii.  17). 
Professor  Eamsay  does  not  approve  of  this  suggestion, 
and  thinks  that  the  Apostles  would  not  desert  their 
post,  seeing  that  concerning  the  earlier  persecution 
against  the  Church,  at  the  time  of  St.  Stephen's  death, 
the  historian  tells  that  they  were  all  scattered  abroad 
throughout  the  regions  of  Judaea  and  Samaria  except 
the  Apostles}  But  then  it  must  be  remembered  that 
the  turn  of  the  Apostles  for  direct  persecution  came 
later,  when  James,  the  brother  of  John,  was  killed  with 
the  sword  and  Peter  was  put  into  prison.  Such  was 
the  state  of  things  when  Paul  and  Barnabas  came  to 
Jerusalem  with  the  offerings  for  the  famine-stricken 
city  (Acts  xii).  It  is  not  at  all  unlikely,  then,  that 
Paul  and  Barnabas  had  no  opportunity  for  any  inter- 
view with  the  Apostles  on  this  occasion.  ^ 

I  cannot,  then,  see  that  St.  Paul's  argument  respect- 
ing the  independence  of  his  Apostolic  authority  is 
rendered  unfair  by  his  omission  to  mention  a  visit  to 
Jerusalem,  in  which  no  conference  with  Apostles  seems 
to  have  taken  place.  And  it  has  already  been  shown 
that     the    argument     is    not    invalidated    but    rather 

^  Acts  viii.  1. 

^  It  is  worth  while  to  observe  that  Dr.  Hort  took  the  same  view 
as  Bishop  Liglitfoot  in  regard  to  this  matter.  (See  The  Christian 
Ecdesia,  pp.  61,  62).  At  the  same  time  I  am  bound  to  acknowledge 
that  there  is  a  serious  discrepancy  between  the  view  of  Dr.  Hort  in 
the  above  place  and  that  given  by  him  on  p.  35  of  his  Prolegomeiia, 
Romans  and  Ephesians,  where,  speaking  of  this  relief  sent  to  Judaea, 
he  says  :  "  By  this  act  the  new  Syrian  church  gave  practical  acknow- 
ledgment of  obligations  to  the  original  church  at  Jerusalem,  and  St. 
Paul  himself  was  brought  into  personal  friendly  relations  with  the 
original  Apostles."  Needless  to  say,  I  am  not  accusing  Dr.  Hort  of 
inconsistency,  for  his  works  are  posthumous  and  not  revised  by 
himself.  No  doubt  the  The  Christian  Ecdesia  gives  his  later  view, 
these  lectures  being  subsequent  to  the  others. 


VISIT   TO   JERUSALEM   OF  GAL.   II.         153 

strengthened    by   taking    the   visit   of   Gal.    ii.    to   be 
subsequent  to  the  founding  of  the  churches  of  Galatia. 

My  conclusion,  then,  is  that  the  visit  to  Jerusalem 
recorded  in  the  second  chapter  of  the  Epistle  to  the 
Galatians  is  to  be  identified  with  that  of  Acts  xv.  And 
such  identification  seems  to  me  to  be  a  corroboration 
of,  and  certainly  in  no  way  an  impediment  to,  the 
South  Galatian  theory. 

Nothing  has  been  said  above  of  the  phrase  ^la 
SeKarea-G-dpcov  ercov.  We  have  not  discussed  whether 
the  fourteen  years  are  to  be  reckoned  from  the  con- 
version or  from  the  third  year  after  the  conversion 
when  the  visit  to  Jerusalem  of  Gal.  i.  18  took  place. 
Such  discussion  has  been  purposely  avoided,  because  it 
seemed  that  either  of  these  two  interpretations  was 
admissible.  The  actual  figures  of  a  chronological  table 
must  come  after,  and  not  before,  a  general  discussion 
of  identification.  And  in  constructing  a  chronological 
table  I  think  that  either  interpretation  of  Sia 
SeKarea-a-apcov  eriJov  is  permissible  as  a  working  hypo- 
thesis. 


PRINTED    AT   THE   UNIVERSITY    PRESS   BY   ROBERT    MAt'LEHOSE   AND   CO. 


Macmillan  &^  Co.'s  Theological  Works 


THE   EPISTLES   OF   ST.   PAUL. 


By  BISHOP  LIGHT  FOOT. 

St.  Paul's  Epistle  to  the  Galatians.  A  Revised  Text,  with  Intro- 
ductions, Notes,  and  Dissertations.     Tenth  edition.     8vo.     12s. 

Notes  on  Epistles  of  St.  Paul  from  Unpublislied  Commentaries.  8vo. 
21s. 

St.  Paul's  Epistle  to  the  Philippians.  A  Revised  Text,  with  Intro- 
duction, Notes,  and  Dissertations.     Ninth  edition.     8vo.     12s. 

St.  Paul's  Epistle  to  the  Colossians  and  to  Philemon.  A  Revised 
Text,  with  Introductions,  etc.     Ninth  edition.     8vo.     12s. 

By  ARCHBISHOP  BENSON. 
An  Exposition  of  the  Epistle  to  the  Romans.     8vo.  {In  the  press. 

By  THE  VERY  REV.  G.  J.    V A  UGH  AN. 
St.  Paul's  Epistle  to  the  Romans.     The  Greek  Text,  with  English 

Notes.     Seventh  edition.     Cr.  8vo.     7s.  6d. 
St.  Paul's  Epistle  to  the  Philippians.    With  Translation,  Paraphrase, 

and  Notes  for  English  Readers.     Cr.  8vo.     5s. 
The  Epistles  of  St.  Paul.     For  English  Readers.     Part  I.  containing 

the  Eirst  Epistle  to  the  Thessalonians.     Second  edition,     8vo. 

Sewed.     Is.  6d.  » 

By  THE  REV.  F.  J.   A.  HORT. 
Prolegomena  to  St.  Paul's  Epistles  to  the  Romans  and  the  Ephesians. 
Cr.  8vo.     6s. 

By  THE  RE  V.  J.  LL.  DA  VIES. 
The  Epistles   of  St.    Paul  to  the  Ephesians,   the   Colossians,    and 
Philemon.      With    Introduction   and    Notes.      Second   edition. 
8vo.     7s.  6d. 

By  THE  REV.  G.    W.  GARROD. 
The  Epistle  to  the  Colossians.     Analysis  and  Examination  Notes. 

Cr.  Svo.     3s.  net. 
The  first  Epistle  to  the  Thessalonians.     Analysis  and  Examination 

Notes.     Cr.  Svo.     8s.  net.  [Shortly. 

By  THE  REV.  J.  ARM  IT  AGE  ROBINSON,  CANON 
OF  WESTMINSTER. 
The  Epistle  to  the  Ephesians.     Greek  Text,  with  Introduction  and 
Commentary.     Svo.  {In  the  press. 

MACMILLAN   AND  CO.,  LIMITED,  LONDON. 


Macmillan  ^  Co.'s  Theological  Works 

THE    EPISTLE   OF    ST.   JAMES. 

The  Epistle  of  St,  James.  The  Greek  Text,  with  Introduction  and 
Notes.  By  Rev.  Joseph  B,  Mayor,  M.A.  Second  edition.  8vo. 
14s.  net. 

THE    EPISTLES    OF    ST.    JOHN. 
The  Epistles  of  St.  John.     By  Rev.  F.  D.  Maurice.     Cr.  8vo.     3s.  6d. 
The  Epistles  of  St.  John.     The  Greek  Text,  with  Notes.     By  the 

Right    Rev.    Bishop    Westcott,    D.D.      Third    edition,     8vo. 

12s.  6d. 

THE   FIRST    EPISTLE   OF   ST.    PETER. 

The  First  Epistle  of  St.  Peter  I.  1,  II.  17.  The  Greek  Text,  with 
Introduction  and  Commentary  by  the  late  Professor  Hort. 
Revised  and  completed  by  Rev.  F.  H.  Chase.     8vo.     6s. 

THE    EPISTLE   TO   THE    HEBREWS. 

The  Epistle  to  the  Hebrews  in  Greek  and  English.     With  Notes. 

By  Rev.  F.  Randall.     Cr.  8vo.     6s. 
The  Epistle   to   the    Hebrews.     English    Text,    with    Commentary. 

By  Rev.  F.  Rendall.     Cr.  Svo.     7s.  6d. 
The  Epistle  to  the  Hebrews.     With  Notes.     By  the  late  Very  Rev. 

C.  J.  Vaughan,  D.D.     Cr.  8vo.     7s.  6d. 
The   Epistle  to  the   Hebrews.     The  Greek  Text,   with  Notes  and 

Essays.     By  Right  Rev.  Bishop  Westcott.     8vo.     14s. 

BOOK   OF   REVELATION. 
An  Exposition  of  the  Book  of  Revelation.     By  Archbishop  Benson. 

8vo.  [In  the  press. 

Lectures   on  the  Apocalypse.     By  Rev.   F.   D.   Maurice.   Cr.   Svo. 

3s.  6d. 
Lectures   on  the   Apocalypse.     By   Rev.    Prof.    W.    Milligan.     Cr. 

8vo.     5s. 
Discussions  on  the  Apocalypse.     By  Rev.  Prof.  W.  Milligan.     Cr. 

8vo.     OS. 
Lectures  on  the  Revelation  of  St.   John.     By  Very  Rev.   the  late 

C.  J.  Vaughan,  D.D.     Fifth  edition.     Cr.  8vo.     lOs.  6d. 

MACMILLAN   AND   CO.,   LIMITED,   LONDON. 


Princeton  Theological  Seminary  Libraries 


1    1012  01185  0197